PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B PTX PRM VGL T5r 254079B

PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B

User Manual: PTX_PRM_VGL_T5r_254079B

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 418

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

IGP®/VGL Emulation for Thermal Printers
Code VTM Graphics Language
Programmer’s Reference Manual

IGP®/VGL Emulation for Thermal Printers
Code V™ Graphics Language
Programmer’s Reference Manual

Printronix, Inc. makes no representations or warranties of any kind regarding
this material, including, but not limited to, implied warranties of
merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose. Printronix, Inc. shall not
be held responsible for errors contained herein or any omissions from this
material or for any damages, whether direct, indirect, incidental or
consequential, in connection with the furnishing, distribution, performance or
use of this material. The information in this manual is subject to change
without notice.
This document contains proprietary information protected by copyright. No
part of this document may be reproduced, copied, translated or incorporated
in any other material in any form or by any means, whether manual, graphic,
electronic, mechanical or otherwise, without the prior written consent of
Printronix, Inc.
COPYRIGHT © 2000, 2012, PRINTRONIX, INC.
All rights reserved.

Trademark Acknowledgements
IBM and IBM PC are registered trademarks of the International Business
Machines Corp.
HP and PCL are registered trademarks of Hewlett-Packard Company.
IGP, LinePrinter Plus, and Printronix are registered trademarks and LaserLine
and PSA are trademarks of Printronix, Inc.
QMS is a registered trademark and Code V is a trademark of Quality Micro
Systems, Inc.
CSA is a registered certification mark of the Canadian Standards Association.
TUV is a registered certification mark of TUV Rheinland of North America, Inc.
UL is a registered certification mark of Underwriters Laboratories, Inc.
This product uses Intellifont Scalable typefaces and Intellifont technology.
Intellifont is a registered trademark of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated
(Agfa).
CG Triumvirate are trademarks of Agfa Division, Miles Incorporated (Agfa).
CG Times, based on Times New Roman under license from The Monotype
Corporation Plc is a product of Agfa.

Table of Contents

1 Overview ............................................................... 13
About this Manual ...................................................................................13
Warnings and Special Information ...................................................13
Features..................................................................................................14
Online Form and Label Generation ..................................................14
Variable Barcodes ............................................................................14
Expanded and Compressed Print ....................................................14
Rotated Alphanumerics ....................................................................14
Logos ...............................................................................................15
Reversed and Shaded Print .............................................................15
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability .....................................15
Multinational and International Character Sets ................................15
New or Different Features for the VGL ...................................................15
Modes of Operation ................................................................................16
Normal Mode....................................................................................16
Graphics Mode .................................................................................16
Extended Graphics Mode.................................................................16
Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode ......................................17
Configuring VGL with the Control Panel .................................................17

2 Commands............................................................ 19
Modes of Operation ................................................................................19
VGL Command Standards......................................................................20
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) ...........................................21
Command Sequence .......................................................................21
Command Parameters .....................................................................21
Brackets ...........................................................................................21
Spaces .............................................................................................22
Comma.............................................................................................22
Terminator ........................................................................................22
Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing......................23
Normal Mode ..........................................................................................23
Graphics Mode .......................................................................................24
Data Positioning ...............................................................................24

Table of Contents

Command Codes.................................................................................... 26
Graphics Mode Enable Commands ................................................. 26
Standard Graphics Commands ........................................................27
Extended Graphics Commands ....................................................... 29
Extended Graphics/High Resolution Commands ............................. 31
Alphanumerics ................................................................................. 32
Boxes ...............................................................................................39
Carriage Return................................................................................ 41
Character Height .............................................................................. 42
Character Width ............................................................................... 44
Character Type ................................................................................ 46
Compressed Print ............................................................................47
Dark Print .........................................................................................49
Descending Characters.................................................................... 51
Direct Printer Commands ................................................................. 53
Dot Slew........................................................................................... 54
Duplication, Horizontal .....................................................................54
Duplication, Horizontal (Version II)................................................... 56
Duplication, Vertical ......................................................................... 57
Duplication, Vertical (Version II) ....................................................... 63
Dynamic Form Commands .............................................................. 65
Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)............................................ 73
Emphasized Print ............................................................................. 76
Emulation Switch.............................................................................. 77
Font Load .........................................................................................77
Font, Selecting Default (Version II) ..................................................78
Fonts, Rotatable............................................................................... 82
Fonts, Compressed Print Density .................................................... 85
Form Feed........................................................................................ 88
Form Length..................................................................................... 89
Forms Construction .......................................................................... 90
Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II) .............................................. 93
Forms, Deleting Dynamic (Version II) .............................................. 94
Forms, Executing Dynamic (Version II)............................................ 94
Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II) ................................................. 95
Forms, Predefined (Version II) ......................................................... 95
Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II) ............................................ 99
Free Format (Enable/Disable) .......................................................... 99
Free Format Enable, Non-Graphics ............................................... 101
Free Format Disable, Non-Graphics .............................................. 102
Graphics Mode Enable...................................................................103
Graphics Mode Disable .................................................................. 104

Table of Contents

Hex Dump ......................................................................................104
Ignore Data ....................................................................................105
Interrupt ..........................................................................................106
Justification, Vertical ......................................................................108
Line Feed .......................................................................................110
Line Slew........................................................................................111
Line Spacing ..................................................................................111
Lines, Dashed ................................................................................113
Lines, Solid.....................................................................................116
Logo Generation (Version II) ..........................................................118
Logo, PCX ......................................................................................120
Logo, TIFF......................................................................................121
Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II) .................................122
Passing Hex Values .......................................................................124
Pixel Expansion (Version II) ...........................................................125
Plotting Bitmap Images ..................................................................127
Plotting Graphics (Columns) ..........................................................129
Plotting Graphics (Rows)................................................................132
Reset ..............................................................................................135
Reverse Print .................................................................................136
Scaling ...........................................................................................138
Shading ..........................................................................................140
Shading Mask ................................................................................142
Special Function Control Code Change .........................................144
Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined ....................................145
Symbols, Creating Expanded User Defined...................................148
Symbols, Printing ...........................................................................150
Tab, Horizontal ...............................................................................151
Tab, Vertical ...................................................................................155
Underlined Print .............................................................................156
Wait For Online ..............................................................................157

3 Barcodes............................................................. 159
Overview...............................................................................................159
Examples .......................................................................................160
Barcode Size/Height Requirements ...............................................160
Barcode Command Format ..................................................................162
Standard Barcode Command Format ............................................163
IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format ............................164

Table of Contents

Barcodes............................................................................................... 167
Australian 4-State........................................................................... 169
BC412 Barcode .............................................................................. 174
Codabar ......................................................................................... 178
Code 39.......................................................................................... 184
Code 93.......................................................................................... 191
Code 128........................................................................................ 195
EAN 8.............................................................................................204
EAN 13........................................................................................... 209
German Interleaved 2/5 ................................................................. 214
GS1-128......................................................................................... 219
GS-1 Data Matrix ........................................................................... 230
Identicon......................................................................................... 239
Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode ..................................................... 242
Interleaved 2/5 ............................................................................... 244
Maxicode........................................................................................ 249
MSI................................................................................................. 254
PDF417 .......................................................................................... 260
Planet .............................................................................................264
POSTNET ...................................................................................... 269
Royal Mail ...................................................................................... 273
Telepen .......................................................................................... 275
UPC-A ............................................................................................ 280
UPC-E ............................................................................................ 285
UPCSHIP .......................................................................................293
UPS 11........................................................................................... 297

4 Exercises And Examples .................................... 301
Practice Using VGL .............................................................................. 301
Practice Graphic Exercise - Normal Resolution .............................302
Practice Graphic Exercise - High Resolution ................................. 306
Form Example ...................................................................................... 311
Page Layout Considerations .......................................................... 311
Planning the Form Layout .............................................................. 311
Label Example ...................................................................................... 328
Solving Program Errors ........................................................................ 336

Table of Contents

5 Multinational And International Character
Sets..................................................................... 337
Multinational Character Sets.................................................................337
Character Addresses .....................................................................338
Making Character Substitutions .....................................................338
Accessing Characters and Character Sets...........................................341
Data Bit 8 .......................................................................................341
Power-Up Character Set Selection ................................................341
Building a Character Translation Table ..........................................341
Resetting the Character Set ...........................................................342
User-Defined Set Command ..........................................................343
Character Set Selection Command................................................345
Selecting an ISO Character Set .....................................................348
Multinational Character Set Charts ................................................349
International Character Sets .................................................................353

6 Error Codes......................................................... 355
The Purpose of Error Codes.................................................................355
Error Codes ..........................................................................................355

A Standard ASCII Character Set............................ 361
B Shading Masks ................................................... 363
Selecting Masks....................................................................................363

C Grid Samples ...................................................... 375
D Page Boundaries ................................................ 379
Paper Selection and Maximum Values.................................................379
Setting Top/Bottom Margins...........................................................380
Setting Left Margins .......................................................................381

E PTX_SETUP Option ........................................... 383
Overview...............................................................................................383
The PTX_SETUP Commands ..............................................................383
Commands .....................................................................................384

F VGL Command Support on L7032 Printers ........ 391
G Glossary.............................................................. 393

Table of Contents

H Contact Information............................................. 403
Printronix Customer Support Center..................................................... 403
Printronix Supplies Department ............................................................ 404
Corporate Offices.................................................................................. 404

Overview

About this Manual
This manual is divided into chapters that contain all the information required
to use the IGP®/VGL® Emulation. Use this manual in conjunction with your
printer User’s Manual for complete printer-VGL compatibility.

Warnings and Special Information
Information requiring special attention is highlighted under special headings.
Always read and comply with this information. The heading reveals the nature
of the information:

WARNING

Conditions that could cause you physical harm as well as damage the
equipment.

CAUTION

Conditions that indicate the possiblity of damage to a program, device,
system, or data.

IMPORTANT

Information vital to proper operation of the printer.
NOTE: Provides helpful tips about printer operation and maintenance.

Chapter

Features

Features
The Code V Graphics Language (VGL) is the QMS compatible Intelligent
Graphics Printing software designed for Printronix thermal, line matrix and
L7032 printers. VGL emulates the QMS Code V Version II programming
language to produce on-line forms, barcodes, and alphanumeric text
generation in both normal and high resolution. The VGL graphics processing
features are detailed below.

Online Form and Label Generation
On-Line Form and Label Generation makes it easy to create forms or labels
with the “preprinted” look for each application. VGL programs control all
graphics functions, dramatically reducing host computer programming and
processing time. Graphics capabilities include boxes, vertical, horizontal, solid
and dashed lines in normal or high resolution with a variety of thickness,
logos, and special alphanumeric print features. Forms and graphic designs
can be duplicated horizontally and vertically.

Variable Barcodes
Variable Barcodes allow the barcode for your application to print easily with
standard or user-defined ratios in vertical or horizontal orientations, in normal
or high resolution. Available barcodes are: Australian 4-State; Codabar; Code
39; Code 128 with Subsets A, B, and C; Code 93; Data Matrix; EAN 8;
EAN 13; German Interleaved 2 of 5; Identicon; Intelligent Mail 4-State;
Interleaved 2 of 5; Maxicode; MSI; Planet; POSTNET; Royal Mail; Telepen;
UCC/EAN-128; UPC-A; UPC-E; UPS 11 and UPC Shipping.
. POSTNET is available only in horizontal direction. Impact printers include a
dark print mode for darker, high-contrast barcodes. The IBARC barcode
command prints barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, rotated 90, rotated
180 or rotated 270 degrees.
See Table 21 on page 167 for a complete list of barcodes.

Expanded and Compressed Print
Expanded and Compressed Print draws attention where needed.
Alphanumeric height and width are controlled independently for a tremendous
range of character sizes up to 9.9 inches wide and tall. Six compressed print
sizes are available: 12, 13.33, 15, 17.65, 20, and 24 cpi (characters per inch),
permitting up to 204 columns in an 8.5-inch printed area (24 cpi). In high
resolution mode, characters can be sized and positioned to hundredth of an
inch specification.

Rotated Alphanumerics
Rotated Alphanumerics permit new concepts in form design. Normal,
expanded, and compressed character strings can be rotated 90 degrees
clockwise, counterclockwise, or printed upside down.

Logos

Logos
Logos are easily created using alphanumeric commands and a variety of print
and shading features, providing a “customized” appearance for forms,
reports, and labels. The registered trademark, copyright, TUV®, GS-Mark,
UL®, and CSA® symbols are provided as standard designs on the VGL, and
you can also define custom symbols.

Reversed and Shaded Print
Reverse and Shaded Print permit highlighting and contrasting by printing
white characters on a dark background or white characters on a gray, shaded
background. Various levels or patterns of gray shading and reverse printing
can be combined with the many other print features to create distinctive
designs.

Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability
Automatic Increment/Decrement Capability allows batch form processing.
Individual numeric and barcode data fields can be identified and automatically
incremented or decremented by any amount, beginning from any specified
number.

Multinational and International Character Sets
Multinational and International Character Sets provide you with access to
predefined international character sets, each 96 characters in length. The
Multinational Character Set also allows you to create your own character sets
using characters defined and stored in memory.

New or Different Features for the VGL
VGL introduces the QMS-compatible Intelligent Graphics Printing software to
the Printronix thermal printer environment. Certain variations due to the line
matrix versus thermal printing technology change the way the VGL operates
in several ways.
•

The “dots” parameter in a command is based on a 60 dots-per-inch (dpi)
horizontal by 72 dpi vertical grid. In normal resolution mode, this grid is
converted to the equivalent number of dots on a high-density, thermal
print engine. For example, 1 horizontal dot on a line matrix printer equals
5 dots on a 300 X 300 dpi thermal printer. In high resolution mode,
however, size and position parameters are specified in inches.

•

Thermal and laser printers cannot produce half-dots. Therefore, for samecpi fonts on a thermal or laser printer, full dot fonts in draft print and halfdot fonts in correspondence print would produce the same number of
dots.

Chapter

Modes of Operation

•

Dark print, used to produce darker looking graphic elements
(e.g., barcodes, shading masks, reverse print, etc.) is a function of line
matrix printers only. The darker looking print is produced by overstriking.
Thermal and laser printers ignore dark print commands.

Modes of Operation
Normal Mode
VGL has two basic modes of operation: Normal and Graphics. In Normal
Mode, all characters and commands are passed directly through VGL to the
Line Printer Plus® Emulation without processing, except to check for the VGL
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) and Graphics Mode command.
All the standard Line Printer Plus Emulation features (such as EVFU,
elongated characters, compressed print, plot mode, etc.) are still available
when VGL is in Normal Mode. However, when VGL receives a Graphics
Mode command, the VGL changes to the Graphics Mode and assumes
control of the printer.

Graphics Mode
In Graphics Mode, all VGL functions are available. The standard graphics
commands provide features such as underline print, horizontal and vertical
duplication, dynamic forms, graphics plotting, and vertical formatting. A
complete listing of all standard graphics commands is provided in the
“Commands” chapter.

Extended Graphics Mode
In addition to the standard graphics commands, the VGL Graphics Mode has
an extended graphics command set, providing more specific graphic features
for forms and labels. Alphanumeric commands, boxes, lines, logos, shading,
special fonts, and all barcodes are part of the extended graphics command
set. Again, complete extended graphics command information is provided in
the “Commands” chapter.
VGL also supports the QMS Version II commands (ILOGO, IPEXP, IISO,
IBARC, IREPH, IREPV, IFONT,S, IHEX, IPLOT, IFORM,C, IFORM,D,
IFORM,E, IFORM,L, and IFORM,R) as well as the original commands
performing the same or similar functions to those in Version II. For example,
the Horizontal Duplication command (S) is still available, while an enhanced
Horizontal Duplication command (IREPH,) is now available with Version II.

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode
Within Graphics Mode, there is an additional high resolution mode called
Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode. In this mode, you can access the
extended graphics commands as well as new commands designed to achieve
enhanced resolution for thermal printing.
Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode allows you to specify graphic
elements and characters in expanded size and position parameters. Graphic
elements (lines, boxes, and forms) can now be defined in increments of one
thousandth of an inch. Characters can now be specified in increments of one
hundredth of an inch. As a result of these enhancements, you can print forms
and labels that include high resolution text, graphics and barcodes.
The actual positioning and size, however, can be only as “fine” as your printer
resolution (dpi). For example, a graphic position change of 0.001, 0.002, or
0.003 would result in one printer dot at 300 dpi (1 - .0033 inches). Also,
because the actual height of characters changes in increments of seven
printer dots (0.0233 inches at 300 dpi), a size specification of 0.01 inch or
0.02 inch would result in a character of the same size.

Configuring VGL with the Control Panel
Matching certain printer operational settings to those of the host computer is
known as printer configuration. The settings, or configuration parameters,
such as selecting the host interface, parallel/serial data input and file
management, are adjusted according to the printer function switch
descriptions in your printer's User's Manual. Configure VGL in the same way
you would configure the printer for other features.
You can select VGL default parameters directly from the control panel as
explained in your User's Manual, or by control codes as explained in the
“Commands” chapter. Your User's Manual also contains detailed
configuration menus and diagrams, as well as descriptions of each
configuration parameter available with your printer.

Chapter

Configuring VGL with the Control Panel

Commands

Modes of Operation
VGL has two basic modes of operation: Normal mode and Graphics mode. In
Normal mode, the data stream passes unchanged to the printer until the
Special Function Control Code (SFCC) and Graphics Mode Enable command
are detected, indicating that special Graphics mode functions follow. All of the
printer standard features operate in Normal mode (such as the EVFU, plot,
hex dump) and the printer responds to command and control codes as
described in the printer User’s Manual.
In Graphics mode, you can generate alphanumeric characters, graphic
components and barcodes. Once the Graphics mode is enabled, specific
command sequences are used to generate a variety of graphics. The
command parameters define height, width, location, and type of graphic
(boxes, lines, alphanumeric characters).
Three types of command sets are used in the Graphics mode:
•

standard graphics

•

extended graphics

•

extended graphics/high resolution.

Figure 1 illustrates the relationship between the Normal and Graphics modes
of operation as described above. In addition, at the beginning of each
command in this chapter, the graphics mode(s) in which that command
operates are listed.

Chapter

VGL Command Standards

VGL
Modes of Operation

Normal Mode

Graphics Mode
(Table 1)

Passes data directly
through to printer.

Enabled with PY Command
(see page 103).

Standard Graphics
(Table 2)

Extended Graphics
(Table 3)
An alphanumeric command from
Table 1 must be entered before using
an Extended Graphics command.

Extended Graphics/
High Resolution
(Table 3)
Extended Graphics/High Resolution
Mode must be enabled
(^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-) before
using a high resolution command.

Figure 1. Modes of Operation

VGL Command Standards
Many of the commands described in this chapter include an example to
illustrate the application. Commas are used in the example commands to
easily identify the various command parameters.
Many of the example commands shown also require the Free Format
command. Using the Free Format command in the examples more clearly
identifies the data and command parameters.
The commands used to operate VGL have various selectable options and a
specific format that you must follow to obtain the desired results. These
command standards are described in the following sections. Become familiar
with their meaning and use before operating VGL.

Special Function Control Code (SFCC)

Special Function Control Code (SFCC)
The SFCC identifies a command directed to VGL to enable a specific VGL
function. Based on the host computer interface or application requirements,
you can set the SFCC to any decimal character from 17 through 255 (hex 11
through hex FF).
When VGL is shipped, the caret symbol (hex 5E), “^”, is configured as the
SFCC. You can change the SFCC as described in your user's manual, or as
described in “Special Function Control Code Change” on page 144.
Throughout the practical examples in this manual, the SFCC is shown as a ^
(caret, hex 5E, dec 94); always use the actual SFCC required by your system
configuration wherever the ^ is shown.
In the general command formats, the SFCC is represented by (cc). Always
substitute the actual SFCC required by your system configuration in the
general command format where (cc) is shown. Do not enter parentheses with
your SFCC.
NOTE: Refer to your User's Manual for a description of SFCC selections.
Perform a configuration printout and examine the configuration option
listing to determine which SFCC is currently selected.

Command Sequence
Individual commands are made up of various command parameters (such as
character height or width parameters). Each command generally begins with
the SFCC. You can string many commands together to form a command
sequence, or command line. After the Graphics Mode is enabled by the
Graphics Mode Enable command, you can input a command sequence. The
command sequence includes all commands and data from the initial SFCC of
the first command to the sequence terminator.
The VGL buffer holds and can process approximately 64K characters in a
single graphics command sequence. However, if a single command
sequence exceeds the buffer capacity, you can use the Interrupt command
(page 106). The Interrupt command breaks the command sequence and
specifies where the sequence begins printing again.

Command Parameters
Most commands have a number of variable parameters for which input is
required. Throughout this manual, actual commands required for input are
shown exactly as they must be entered, while all the variable parameters
associated with that command are shown in italics.

Brackets
Paired brackets [ ] indicate an optional command parameter. You can choose
to use or not use such a command parameter, but do not enter the brackets in
the command sequence.

Chapter

VGL Command Standards

Spaces
Spaces are used in the general command formats to visually separate
individual command parameters. You must supply the information for the
command parameter, but do not enter the spaces in the command sequence;
they are shown simply as a visual aid to illustrate where one command
parameter ends and another begins.

Comma
VGL accepts commas as parameter diameters. Commas are often helpful in
distinguishing the various numeric parameters within the command
sequence. Commas are not allowed immediately after the SFCC or before the
first data character. Commas within the command sequence are optional
unless they are a part of the command format (i.e., IBARC, IFONT,S, etc.). If
used, commas occupy character spaces in the buffer and require processing
time. In the practical examples throughout this manual, commas are used in
the command sequences.

Terminator
Each command line, or command sequence, must be followed by a valid
terminator. Valid terminators are as follows: carriage return (CR, hex 0D), line
feed (LF, hex 0A), form feed (FF, hex 0C), vertical tab (VT, hex 0B), EVFU
commands (hex 10-1F), hex 01 and hex 06, and PI line commands. A
complete command sequence is the very first character (including the SFCC)
to and including the terminator.
Certain terminators have different functional effects based on their use with
standard graphics commands or within extended graphics command
sequences. For example, CR, FF, and LF function as sequence terminators
within an extended graphics command sequence.
If the Free Format command is used, host generated terminators are ignored
and only the standard graphics command terminators are recognized. See
Table 2 on page 27 for a list of the Standard Graphics Commands and
appropriate page references where additional information is provided.

Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing

Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing
Alphanumeric height and width parameters include the intercharacter spacing
as shown in Figure 2. The intercharacter spacing is the space between
characters. (Scalable fonts, however, change the size of the intercharacter
gap used depending on the characters used.) Intercharacter spacing is
measured to the right of standard or upside-down characters and to the
bottom of sideways characters.
For example, specifying a character width of .5-inch in normal resolution
results in a five-dot column intercharacter spacing to the right or bottom of that
character based on orientation. Generally, intercharacter spacing is not
accounted for to the left, above, or below characters except when printing
reverse images or descending characters.
INTERCHARACTER SPACING
1 DOT COLUMN PER 0.1" OF WIDTH

HEIGHT
DETERMINED
BY Ht
PARAMETER

WIDTH DETERMINED
BY wd PARAMETER

HEIGHT
DETERMINED
BY Ht
PARAMETER

WIDTH DETERMINED
BY wd PARAMETER

INTERCHARACTER SPACING
1 DOT COLUMN PER 0.1" OF HEIGHT

Figure 2. Character Height, Width, and Intercharacter Spacing

Normal Mode
In Normal Mode, data passes directly through VGL to the printer without
processing except to check for the SFCC and the Graphics Mode Enable or
the Enable Non-Graphics Free Format command. This normal, or passthrough, data assumes the standard 10 cpi print mode, and all other standard
printer features function normally according to the configuration and
programming of the printer.
NOTE: Printers must be configured at the control panel for Data Processing
10 cpi (DP 10) print mode at 6 lpi for VGL to operate properly. To set
a line spacing when VGL is active, use the Line Spacing (@L)
command described on page 110.

Chapter

Graphics Mode

Graphics Mode
Some graphics commands have different functions depending on whether the
command is used within an extended or a standard graphics command
sequence. For example, the W command identifies a standard graphics
command line slew; when used within an extended graphics command
sequence, W identifies a Character Width Change command. Therefore, be
certain of appropriate command usage to obtain the desired results.
Also, graphic commands have different parameters and different functionality
depending on whether the command is used in normal or high resolution
graphics mode.
Each command in this chapter is presented in alphabetical order. The tables
on the following pages list VGL commands according to the graphics mode in
which it operates. Information specific to the Extended Graphics/High
Resolution Mode, such as expanded parameter definition, is supplied on the
command description page for each command available in the mode.

Data Positioning
In Graphics Mode, you must understand certain positioning rules to obtain the
desired results. Horizontal and vertical starting positions of a command are
determined either by implied relative position to the prior graphics command
or explicit position from a positioning command.

Implied Relative Positioning
For any graphics command sequence (a string of one or more extended
graphics commands), the initial "relative" print position is the current dot row
and column 1 or the Graphics margin, if set.
NOTE: Because previous command sequences may have been used to
define prior printing on the page, the actual physical position of the
print mechanism may be on a different row, but it will be always in
column 1 or the Graphics margin, if set.
Without an immediately preceding positioning command, the starting position
of any command within the sequence is dot row 1 and the first dot column
past the right edge of the previous command "print envelope." This implied
position may be modified horizontally or vertically by specific positioning
commands.
Without explicit horizontal positioning commands, the horizontal print position
constantly increases within the command sequence. Each command starts at
the right edge of the previous command. Without explicit vertical positioning
commands, the vertical print position for each command within a sequence is
always at relative dot row 1 (the current physical position of the print
mechanism resulting from printing the last sequence).

Data Positioning

Explicit Positioning Commands
Use the Horizontal Tab command to change the horizontal print position. With
the Horizontal Tab command, any horizontal print position on the current print
line can be specified as the print position.
NOTE: The control panel form feed key will operate differently depending on
the source of form feed control at the time the key is pressed. Form
feed is controlled by the LP+ and VGL emulation at different times.
The vertical print position can be changed using the Justification command or
justification parameter within one of the alphanumeric commands. The
Justification command or parameter specifies a vertical position down the
form from the current print position. Additionally, you can use standard
graphics commands for line slew, dot slew, line feed, form feed, or EVFU
commands to specify a vertical print position.
These positioning commands and their use are described within this chapter.
It is important to remember that the end of a command sequence always
resets the "origin" for all subsequent positioning to row 1, column 1 or the left
Graphics margin.

Vertical Dot Density
A vertical tenth-inch in normal resolution mode equals 7 dots based on 72 dpi
vertical dot density. A true vertical tenth-inch at 72 dpi would be 7.2 dots.
Since .2 dots is not printable, seven dots are used and the vertical
measurement of a line, box, or similar graphic element is not exact.
A vertical inch in high resolution mode equals 292/300 times the printer
vertical dot density. A vertical inch at 300 dpi would be 292 dots. Therefore,
when specifying the size of your graphic elements, be aware that the vertical
dimensions of your graphic design print slightly smaller than the value
specified in your command.
You can enable the "True vert 1/10" option which allows the vertical size/
position parameter to be in true inches. With this option enabled in normal
resolution, vertical dimensions are as close to true as possible based on a 72
dpi dot density (e.g., 1.0 inch is exact at 72 dots. While 1.2 inch is close at 86
dots, exact would be 86.4 dots.) In high resolution, with true vert 1/10, vertical
dimensions are exact or nearly exact due to the higher dot density.

Chapter

Command Codes

Command Codes
The tables on the following pages list each VGL command according to the
Graphics Mode in which it operates. Following these tables, each command in
this chapter is presented in alphabetical order.

Graphics Mode Enable Commands
To enable the Graphics Mode, you must use the Graphics Mode Enable
command. Table 1 summarizes the Graphics Mode Enable and Disable
commands and the four alphanumeric commands, which are fully described
on the referenced pages. After enabling the Graphics Mode, alphanumeric
commands, standard graphics commands, or extended graphics commands
are available.

Table 1. Graphics Mode Commands
Command
IPARAM

Page #

Graphics Resolution

Free-Format Enable, Non-Graphics

101

Free Format Disable, Non-Graphics

102

Free Format (graphics) Enable

Free Format (graphics) Disable

Graphics Mode Enable

103

Graphics Mode Disable

104

Alphanumerics, Standard

Alphanumerics, Rotated Clockwise (Top Down)

Alphanumerics, Rotated Counterclockwise (Bottom Up)

Alphanumerics, Rotated Counterclockwise-Reverse String

Alphanumerics, Inverted

Alphanumerics, Inverted-Reverse String

Character Set Selection (Multinational Character Set)

337

Interrupt

106

User Set Selection (Multinational Character Set)

343

Page, Controlling Paper Options

122

I
un
IPAGE

Description

Standard Graphics Commands

NOTE: Some systems pad the data stream with characters and spaces. If the
VGL file on your system contains padded characters or spaces
before the SFCC, this padded data must be ignored before VGL can
operate. The Ignore Data command (X), discussed on page 105, is
provided for this purpose.
Similarly, sometimes you may need VGL to ignore host-generated
paper movement commands (carriage return, line feed, form feed,
etc.) in lengthy data streams. The Free Format command (F),
discussed on page 99, is designed for this purpose.

Standard Graphics Commands
Standard graphics commands can be used any time VGL is in the Graphics
Mode. They set internal control values or are sent directly to the printer for
processing. Standard graphics commands are summarized in Table 2 and
fully described on the referenced pages.
NOTE: The Graphics Mode (Table 1) must be enabled before issuing a
Standard Graphics command.

Table 2. Standard Graphics Commands
Command

Description

Page #

Carriage Return

Character Type

Compressed Print

Direct Printer Command, Hex 01

Direct Printer Command, Hex 02

Direct Printer Command, Hex 03

Direct Printer Command, Hex 04

Direct Printer Command, Hex 05

Direct Printer Command, Hex 06

Direct Printer Command, Hex 07

(

Direct Printer Command, Hex 08

Direct Printer Command, Hex 0E

Direct Printer Command, Hex 0F

Dot Slew

Duplication, Horizontal

Duplication, Horizontal (Version II)

Duplication, Vertical

Auto-Increment/Decrement Vertical Duplication

IREPH,

Chapter

Command Codes

Table 2. Standard Graphics Commands (continued)
Command
IREPV,

Page #

Duplication, Vertical (Version II)

Dynamic Form

[ or {

Dynamic Form, Field Length

Dynamic Form, Copy Fields

Dynamic Form, Repeat Form

EVFU, Start Load

EVFU End Load

EVFU Channels 1 through 10

EVFU Channel 11

;

EVFU Channel 12

EVFU Channel 13

EVFU Channel 14

Emphasized Print

IEMUL,

Emulation Switch

Form Feed

Form Length (with PI Line Enabled)

Form Length

ILOAD,

Font Load

IFONT,

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Free Format (graphics) Enable

Free Format (graphics) Disable

Hex Dump

104

Ignore Data

105

Line Feed

110

Line Slew

111

Line Slew

111

Line Spacing

111

Plotting Graphics (Rows), (Odd Dot Plot)

132

Plotting Graphics (Rows), (Even Dot Plot)

132

Reset

135

0-9

Description

Extended Graphics Commands

Table 2. Standard Graphics Commands (continued)
Command

Description

Page #

Special Function Control Code Change

144

Tab, Horizontal (Set Graphics Margin)

151

Tab, Vertical

155

Underlined Print

156

Extended Graphics Commands
Specific graphics functions (lines, boxes, alphanumerics, forms, barcodes,
reverse printing, etc.) are available through commands sent as part of an
extended graphics command sequence. Table 3 summarizes the extended
graphics commands, which are fully described on the referenced pages.
Extended commands must be used as part of an alphanumeric command
sequence (after VGL is in the Graphics Mode). In some cases, the actual
command may have a different meaning and perform a different function
when used within an extended graphics command sequence compared to its
use as a standard graphics command.
NOTE: An alphanumeric command from Table 1 must be used before issuing
an Extended Graphics Command.

Table 3. Extended Graphics Commands
Command

Description

Page #

IBARC,

Barcode (Version II)

164

Barcode, Horizontal

160

Barcode, Vertical

160

Boxes

Character Height

Character Width

Character Set Selection

345

Dark Print

Descending Characters

IREPH,

Duplication, Horizontal (Version II)

IREPV,

Duplication, Vertical (Version II)

Fill (for Standard and Expanded User-Defined Symbols)

148

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Fonts, Rotatable

f
IFONT,S,
Font

Chapter

Command Codes

Table 3. Extended Graphics Commands (continued)
Command

Page #

Fonts, Compressed Print Density

Forms Construction

IFORM,C

Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II)

IFORM,D

Forms, Deleting Dynamic (Version II)

IFORM,E

Forms, Executing Dynamic (Version II)

IFORM,L

Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II)

IFORM,R

Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II)

Justification, Vertical

108

Lines, Dashed

113

Lines, Solid

116

Plotting Graphics (Columns)

129

Passing Hex Value to the Printer

124

Logo Generation (Version II)

118

IPCX,

Logo, PCX

120

ITIFF,

Logo, TIFF

121

IPEXP,

Pixel Expansion (Version II)

125

IPLOT,

Plotting Bitmap Images

127

Reverse Print

136

Shading

140

Shading Mask

142

Symbols, Printing

150

Symbol, Creating Expanded User-Defined

148

Symbol, Creating Standard User-Defined

145

Tab, Horizontal

151

IHEX,
ILOGO,

Description

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Commands

Extended Graphics/High Resolution Commands
In Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, you can access the extended
graphics commands as well as new commands designed to achieve
enhanced resolution for thermal printing. This mode allows you to specify
graphic elements and characters in expanded size and position parameters.
Graphic elements (lines, boxes, and forms) can now be defined in increments
of one thousandth of an inch. Characters can now be specified in increments
of one hundredth of an inch. As a result of these enhancements, you can print
forms and labels that include high resolution text, graphics and barcodes.
The actual positioning and size, however, can be only as "fine" as your printer
resolution (dpi). For example, a graphic position change of 0.001, 0.002, or
0.003 would result in one printer dot at 300 dpi (1 - .0033 inches). Also,
because the actual height of characters change in increments of seven printer
dots (0.0233 inches at 300 dpi), a size specification of 0.01 inch or 0.02 inch
would result in a character of the same size.
To enable Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, you must have already
enabled Graphics Mode through use of the ^PY command. You cannot
enable the Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, however, from within a
graphics pass (an alphanumeric command, ^M, ^E, ^U, or ^V).
Once in Graphics Mode, type the following command to enable Extended
Graphics/High Resolution Mode:
^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^-

Once in Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode, type the following
command to return to normal resolution Graphics Mode:
^IPARAM,NORMAL^G^-

VGL initially operates in normal resolution mode. To switch between normal
and high resolution, send the appropriate command shown above, or use the
"Cmd Resolution" option on the front panel menu.
You can switch between normal and high resolution between graphics passes
on the same page. VGL maintains the current resolution setting after a ^PN
("Exit Graphics Mode") command has been sent.
Example:
^PY^^IPARAM,EXTENDED^G^^M02002001000 text in high resolution^^IPARAM,NORMAL^G^^M0202100 text in normal resolution^^PN^-

Chapter

Command Codes

Alphanumerics
Purpose

Produces alphanumeric text (i.e., numbers and alphabet letters)
in standard, rotated or inverted orientations. A reverse string
order option is also available in the rotated and inverted
orientations.

Mode

Graphics

Format

(cc) x ht wd jus data [(cc)G] (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Represents an Alphanumeric command. Replace x
with one of the following alphanumeric orientations:
M for Standard Alphanumerics
V for Rotated Clockwise
E for Rotated Counterclockwise
U for Inverted

Normal Resolution:
Defines the character height in tenth (.10) inches.
Enter a two-digit height value ranging from 01
through 99 to define a character height of 0.1
through 9.9 inches. VGL automatically understands
the decimal point between the first and second
digits. Height values of 00 and 01 have special
meanings for rotatable/high-speed fonts as
described in “Fonts, Rotatable” on page 82.
High Resolution:
Defines the character height in hundredth (.01)
inches. Enter a three-digit height value ranging
from 001 through 999 to define a character height
of 0.01 inch through 9.99 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal point
between the first and second digits.
The actual height of the printed character increases
in increments of seven printer dots. Changing the ht
field by one printer dot, therefore, may not produce
a change in the actual printed character. You must
increase the field by at least seven printer dots in
order to produce an actual change in character
height.

Normal Resolution:
Defines the character width in tenth (.10) inches.
Enter a two-digit width value ranging from 01
through 99 to define a character width of 0.1
through 9.9 inches. VGL automatically understands
the decimal point between the first and second
digits. Width values of 00 and 01 have special
meanings for rotatable/high-speed fonts as
described in “Fonts, Rotatable” on page 82.

Alphanumerics

High Resolution:
Defines the character width in hundredth (.01)
inches. Enter a three-digit width value ranging from
001 through 999 to define a character width of 0.01
inch through 9.99 inches. VGL automatically
understands the decimal point between the first
and second digits.
The actual width of the printed character increases
in increments of six printer dots (characters per
inch). Changing the wd field by one printer dot,
therefore, may not produce a change in the actual
printed character. You must increase the field by at
least six printer dots in order to produce an actual
change in character width.
NOTE: High Resolution mode does not allow a character height or width
parameter of 0. If 0 is used, a 1 is substituted. Fonts, Rotatable (see
page 82) cannot be accessed in High Resolution.
NOTE: In vertical alphanumeric commands, height refers to the physical
height of the character and intercharacter spacing top to bottom on
the page (from the left to right edge of the printed character). Width
refers to the physical width of the character from left to right on the
page (from the bottom to the top of the printed character).
jus

Normal Resolution:
Defines vertical justification (position) for character
printing in tenth inches and dot rows. Enter a threedigit value ranging from 000 through 999 to define
the printing location down from the starting position
of the command sequence. The first two digits
specify 0.1 through 9.9 inches downward
justification; the third digit specifies an additional 0
through 9 dot rows of downward justification. VGL
automatically understands the decimal point
between the first two digits and the third digit is
automatically interpreted as dot rows.
High Resolution:
Defines vertical justification (position) for character
printing in thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit
value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define
the printing location down from the starting position
of the command sequence from 0.0 inch through
99.999 inches. VGL automatically understands the
decimal point between the second and third digits
as thousandths.

Chapter

Command Codes

If the data character immediately following the jus
field is not a digit (zero through nine), then you can
omit trailing zeros. For example, the command
^M10010001ABC, results in a 1.000 inch
justification because the three empty spaces in the
jus field (before the characters “ABC”) are
completed with three implied trailing zero digits.
(See “Justification, Vertical” on page 108.)
NOTE: If your data to be printed begin with a number (not a character), then
you must complete the field; otherwise, VGL assumes the number is
a digit in the field value.
As in normal resolution mode, the ht field of either an alphanumeric
command or a height/width command also specifies the height of any
succeeding barcode in the graphics pass. The field value is not
specified in increments of six or seven printer dots, however. In
normal resolution mode, you can select character sizes 10 characters
per inch (cpi), 12 cpi, 15 cpi and size 0 by height and width
parameters in 0 and 1 digit combinations. You cannot perform this
type of character size selection, however, in Extended Graphics/High
Resolution Mode.
data

The data characters to print or a specific graphics
command (such as one of the barcode commands,
a horizontal tab command, etc.).

(cc)G

(Optional) Reverses the character data from the
actual input order. This parameter is available only
with the Rotated Counterclockwise command (E) or
the Inverted Rotated Alphanumeric command (U).
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by G.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Comments
The Graphics Mode (PY) must be enabled before sending an
alphanumeric command. Alphanumeric commands must be a
part of the command sequence before using specific graphics
commands. Alphanumeric commands must be used to initiate
any extended graphic command sequence. Other data or graphic
commands can be used with alphanumeric commands.
Examples Normal resolution examples for each of the four alphanumeric
orientations follow. Rotated Clockwise alphanumerics print
characters with a clockwise vertical rotation; the characters are
read top to bottom. Rotated Counterclockwise alphanumerics
print characters with a counterclockwise vertical rotation; the
characters are read bottom to top. Inverted alphanumerics print
characters upside down; the characters are read right to left.
Rotated Counterclockwise and Inverted Rotated alphanumerics
have an optional reverse string parameter option.

Alphanumerics

NOTE: When the alphanumeric command is used simply to introduce one of
the extended graphics commands (such as Horizontal Tabs,
Justification, Dark Print, etc.), the alphanumeric command
parameters are optional and can be entered only as needed.
However, the alphanumeric command parameters are required for
Barcode commands.

Alphanumerics Examples
The following sample commands in this section illustrate some applications
for standard, rotated and inverted alphanumeric features in normal resolution
mode. (Note that the Free Format enable and disable commands, ^F and ^O,
are used.)

Standard Alphanumerics:
^PY^-^F^^M06,04,000AaBb^M04,06,000AaBb^^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^^M03,03,000I^M03,03,030G^M03,03,060P
^M03,03,060I^M03,03,030G^M03,03,000P^^O^-^PN^-

alph

Rotated Clockwise Alphanumerics:
^PY^-^F^^V06,04,000AaBb^V04,06,000AaBb^^O^-^PN^-

Chapter

Command Codes

^PY^-^F^^V03,03,000I^V03,03,030G^V03,03,060P
^V03,03,060I^V03,03,030G^V03,03,000P^^O^-^PN^-

alpha.ex4

Rotated Counterclockwise Alphanumerics:
^PY^-^F^^E06,04,000AaBb^E04,06,000AaBb^^O^-^PN^-

alpha.ex5

^PY^-^F^^E03,03,000I^E03,03,030G^E03,03,060P
^E03,03,060I^E03,03,030G^E03,03,000P^^O^-^PN^-

alpha.ex6

Alphanumerics

Inverted Alphanumerics:
^PY^-^F^^U06,04,000AaBb^U04,06,000AaBb^^O^-^PN^-

alpha.e

^PY^-^F^^U03,03,000I^U03,03,030G^U03,03,060P
^U03,03,060I^U03,03,030G^U03,03,000P^^O^-^PN^-

alpha.ex8

^PY^-^F^^U03,03,000IGP^U03,03,060PGI^^O^-^PN^-

alpha.ex

Chapter

Command Codes

Alphanumerics Reverse String:
^PY^-^F^^E08,05,000IGP^E08,05,000IGP^G^^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^^M020,020,01000^T01.500HIGH RESOLUTION SMALL PRINT
^I01.500^^M006.008.00000^T01.500SIX BY EIGHT
^M010.010.00000^T03.500TEN BY TEN
^M012.010.00000^T05.500TWELVE BY TEN
^^O^-^PN^-

^PY^-^F^^M020.020.00000^T01.200HIGH RESOLUTION REVERSE STRING
^I00.500^^U055.030.00000^T01.000^D
upside down^D^^U055.030.00000^T01.000^Dupside down reversed^G^D^^O^-^PN^-

Boxes

Boxes
Purpose

Produces a rectangular box.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) LB horz vert h v (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Box command. Enter LB.

horz

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of the box in tenth
inches and dot columns. Enter a three-digit
horizontal length value ranging from 000 through
999 to define a horizontal length of 00.0 through
99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0
through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot
columns of length. VGL automatically understands
the decimal between the second and third digits for
tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth
digit as dot columns. For example, entering 0126
specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-dot column horizontal
length; entering 1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6dot column horizontal length.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of the box in
thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal
value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define
a horizontal length of 0.000 inch through 99.999
inches. VGL automatically understands the decimal
between the second and third digits. The horz field
must be at least twice the value of the thickness of
the vertical sides (v).

vert

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of the box in tenth inches
and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical length
value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a
vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a
fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0
through 9 additional dot rows of length. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits for tenth inches and
automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot rows.
For example, entering 0204 specifies a 2.0-inch
plus 4-dot row vertical length; entering 0242
specifies a 2.4-inch and 2-dot row vertical length.

Chapter

Command Codes

High Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of the box in thousandth
inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from
00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of
0.001 through 99.999 inches. VGL automatically
understands the decimal between the second and
third digits. The vert field must be at least twice the
value of the thickness of the horizontal sides (h).
h

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal border thickness in dot
columns. Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9
to specify a horizontal border thickness from 1
through 9 dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal border thickness in
thousandth inches. Enter a three-digit value
ranging from 000 through 999 to define a horizontal
border thickness from 0.000 through 0.999 inches.

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical border thickness in dot rows.
Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to specify
a vertical border thickness from 1 through 9 dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the vertical border thickness in thousandth
inches. Enter a three-digit value ranging from 000
through 999 to define a horizontal border thickness
from 0.000 through 0.999 inches.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Comments
Box drawing uses horizontal and vertical length parameters.
Boxes are positioned on the page using an alphanumerics
command sequence (such as horizontal tabs, the justification
parameter, etc.). Consequently, an alphanumeric command must
precede a Box command. The horizontal and vertical border
thickness can also be specified in varying line thicknesses.

Carriage Return

Examples The following commands illustrate boxes in normal resolution. As
shown in the examples, changing the horizontal and vertical
length and border thickness parameter values construct a variety
of boxes. (The Graphics Mode Enable command and an
alphanumerics command were previously sent.)
^LB0425,0150,5,2^-

^LB0052,0123,3,2^-

^LB0100,0100,9,9^-

Carriage Return
Purpose

Terminates a command.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format

(cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The graphics CR mnemonic. Enter -.

Comments
The VGL Graphics Mode carriage return (CR) performs the same
function as a standard carriage return (hex 0D) when used to
terminate a standard graphics command. When used to
terminate a graphics sequence in an extended graphics
command when Free Format is enabled, this command functions
as a sequence terminator.

Chapter

Command Codes

Character Height
Purpose

Specifies a new alphanumeric height.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) H ht data (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Character Height command. Enter H.

Normal Resolution:
Defines the new character height in tenth inches.
Enter a two-digit height value ranging from 01
through 99 to define a character height of 0.1
through 9.9 inches. The decimal point between the
digits is automatically understood by VGL.
High Resolution:
Defines the new character height in hundredth
inches. Enter a three-digit height value ranging
from 001 through 999 to define a character height
of 0.01 inch through 9.99 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal point
between the first and second digits. The actual
height of the printed character increases in
increments of seven printer dots. Changing the ht
field by one printer dot, therefore, may not produce
a change in the actual printed character. You must
increase the field by at least seven printer dots in
order to produce an actual change in character
height.
The printable data for the new height is input
following the new height parameter.

data

Identifies the characters to print at the new height.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Comments The H command specifies a new alphanumerics height
parameter without sending the complete alphanumerics
command sequence again. Only the character height is affected
by this command; character width, justification, rotation, or any
other parameter specifications remain unchanged. The Character
Height command is input as part of the data in one of the
alphanumeric commands.

Character Height

Examples The following sample commands illustrate character height
changes in normal resolution. (The Graphics Mode Enable
command was previously sent to enable Graphics Mode but is
not shown in the examples.)
^M12,06,000Aa^H10Bb^H05Cc^-

charht.

^V05,05,000I^H10G^H15P^-

charht.2

^U03,04,000up^H05side^H10down^-

Chapter

Command Codes

Character Width
Purpose

Specifies a new alphanumeric width.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) W wd data (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Character Width command. Enter W.

Normal Resolution:
Defines the new character width in tenth inches.
Enter a two-digit width value ranging from 01
through 99 to define a character width of 0.1
through 9.9 inches. VGL automatically understands
the decimal point between the digits.
High Resolution:
Defines the new character width in hundredth
inches. Enter a three-digit width value ranging from
001 through 999 to define a character width of 0.01
inch to 9.99 inches. VGL automatically understands
the decimal point between the first and second
digits.
The actual width of the printed character increases
in increments of six printer dots (characters per
inch). Changing the wd field by one printer dot,
therefore, may not produce a change in the actual
printed character. You must increase the field by at
least six printer dots in order to produce an actual
change in character width.
The printable data for the new width is input
following the new width parameter.

data

Identifies the characters to print at the new width.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Comments
The W command specifies a new alphanumerics width parameter
without sending the complete alphanumerics command
sequence again. Only the character width is affected by this
command; character height, justification, rotation, or any other
parameter specifications remain unchanged. The W command is
input as part of the data in one of the alphanumeric commands.

Character Width

Examples The following sample commands illustrate character width
changes in normal resolution.
^PY^^M10,10,000A^W02B^W30C^W05D^^PN^-

^PY^^V05,05,000I^W10G^W15P^^PN^-

charwd.ex

NOTE: The command sequence below also uses the Horizontal Tab (T012,5
and T017,5) command for character spacing.
^PY^^E10,10,000I^T012,5^W02G^T017,5^W25P^^PN^-

^PY^^U05,05,000DOWN^W01SIDE^W10UP^^PN^-

cha

Chapter

Command Codes

Character Type
Purpose

Selects a character type or character per inch (cpi) density.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format

(cc) @ C type (cc)* data (cc)*
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Character Type command. Enter C.

type (cc)*

Represents the type parameter. Enter one of the 2digit codes shown in Table 4 to select a character
type, followed by the SFCC. For example, enter
^@C17^* to select 17.65 cpi. This cpi remains
effective until a new @C command is sent.

data

The data to be printed in a selected font.

(cc)*

Graphics Mode LF. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by * to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The @C command can be used anytime VGL is in the Graphics
Mode. Once a new character type is selected, all standard
Graphics mode text lines are printed in the selected type until
another type is selected or VGL returns to the Normal Mode. If
another type is selected, it must be introduced on a separate line
from the currently selected character type.

Table 4. Character Type Codes
Character Type Code

Character Type Selected

Double High (.2”)

OCR-A

OCR-B

Standard 10 cpi

12 cpi

13.33

15 cpi

17.65

20.0 cpi

24.0 cpi

Compressed Print

NOTE: Due to different printing technologies and dot sizes, some printers
may not be capable of printing small characters clearly.
Example

The following example illustrates changing character type from
the standard characters to 17.65 cpi characters.

^PY^Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode
^@C17^*Compressed 17.65 cpi characters after the Character Type
command^*
^@C10^^PN^NOTE: The second character type is sent to return VGL to standard 10 cpi
print.

Compressed Print
Purpose

Selects a compressed print font.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format

(cc) #x (cc)- data (cc)*
(cc) #0 (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the compressed print font to use. The
values for x and the corresponding compression
are shown in Table 5.

Table 5. Compressed Print Fonts
Selection
Code (x)

Compressed Print Font
Characters per Inch (cpi)
0

Terminate compressed print

10 cpi

12 cpi

13.33 cpi

15 cpi

17.65 cpi

OCR-A

OCR-B

12 cpi

15 cpi

Chapter

Command Codes

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator
representing an end to the initial command
sequence. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
initial sequence.

data

The data for compressed print. All characters are
printed in the specified compressed print font until
the compressed print command is terminated (0).

(cc)*

Graphics Mode LF used as a sequence terminator
representing an end to the data sequence. Enter
the SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately
followed by * to end the data sequence.

(cc)#0

The command to terminate compressed printing.
On a separate line, enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by #0 to
terminate use of the compressed print font.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The Compressed Print command can be used anytime VGL is in
the Graphics Mode to select one of the compressed print fonts.
The Compressed Print Off command must be on a separate line
from a Compressed Print On command.
Do not place compressed print and alphanumeric commands
from the Extended Graphics command set on the same print line.
All pass-through text data input after the Compressed Print On
command and before the Compressed Print Off command prints
in the selected compressed print font.
Examples #1: 12 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command
generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 12 cpi
compressed print font.
^PY^^#2^-BCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*
^#0^^PN^-

compress
#2: 13.33 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command
generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 13.33
cpi compressed print font.

^PY^^#3^-ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*
^#0^^PN^-

Dark Print

#3: 15 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command
generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 15 cpi
compressed print font.
^PY^^#4^-ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*
^#0^^PN^-

compress
#4: 17.65 cpi Compressed Print Font. The following command
generates the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the 17.65
cpi compressed print font.

^PY^^#5^-ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^*
^#0^^PN^-

compress.ex5

Dark Print
Purpose

Activates the dark printing feature on line matrix printers to
produce darker images.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) KF data (cc) KF (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Dark Print command. Enter KF to turn on the
dark printing feature.

data

Represents the data characters for dark printing.

(cc) KF

Following the data, enter the Special Function
Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration
and KF to turn off the dark printing feature.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Chapter

Command Codes

Comments
NOTE: Dark printing has no effect on thermal and laser L7032 printers and is
included for compatibility with line matrix printers.
Dark Print command prints all dot positions at half-dot resolution
to produce images with a darker intensity. The KF command
provides special attention when used with barcodes to provide
darker barcodes, yet not change the critical bar-width
dimensions. Human readable data, however, will print in non-dark
mode. Dark print is discussed further in the Chapter 3, on
page 159.
The KF command operates as a toggle. The first KF command
enables dark printing, the second KF disables dark printing, the
third KF enables dark printing, and so on.
All data following the first KF command will print dark until the
second KF command is encountered.
The KF command is a part of the data contained in an
alphanumeric command. When the alphanumeric command
sequence is terminated, dark printing is also disabled.
Reverse printing and shading or mask shading can be combined
with dark printing to produce a variety of different shades.
Example

The following sample commands illustrate dark printing.
Combining shading and dark print is also shown.

^PY^^M03,03,000IGP^KFIGP^KHIGP^KH^KF^^PN^-

^PY^^V05,05,000IGP^KFIGP^KHIGP^KF^KH^^PN^-

Descending Characters

Descending Characters
Purpose

Prints descending lowercase characters one of two ways: 1) by
extending below the print baseline, or 2) by raising the characters
slightly to completely contain the descending characters above
the print baseline.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) D data (cc)D (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Descending Character command. Enter D.

data

The data characters for descending character
printing. Only lowercase descending characters are
printed extending below the print baseline.

(cc)D

Following the data, enter the Special Function
Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration
and D to turn off descending character printing.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Comments
Descending characters are the lowercase characters g, j, p, q,
and y and are the only characters affected by this command.
Normal descending characters extend below the baseline of
normal print. Unless specified, VGL begins each alphanumerics
command sequence with descending character print turned off,
which means the characters are printed completely above the
print baseline.
The D command operates as a toggle. The first D command
enables descending characters to print below the baseline, the
second D command disables this feature, the third D command
enables, and so on. All lowercase descending character data
following the first D command prints below the print baseline until
the next D command is encountered.
The D command is input as part of the data in one of the
alphanumeric commands. When the alphanumerics command
sequence is terminated, descending character printing is also
terminated.
When the D command is turned on, VGL automatically allows
space for the descending characters whether or not descending
characters are part of the data. The amount of space allowed is
two dot rows per tenth inch of character height. This space
produces a gap under the standard print baseline of
non-descending characters. This space also produces a larger
reverse print character image background area.

Chapter

Command Codes

NOTE: The default setting for the D command is OFF.
The default setting for the IFONT command, however, is ON.
If the D command is used after an IFONT command and before the
command terminator, the D command will always be ON. The IFONT
command always overrides a D command.
Example

The following sample commands illustrate descending character
printing. In the first example, notice that the alphanumerics
command sequence terminator was also used to end descending
character printing. In the second example, notice that when using
the rotate clockwise (^V) command with descending characters,
and dots are positioned in the first dot column, a .10-inch tab was
required to prevent out-of-bounds descending characters.

^PY^^M02,02,000IGP or igp^D and IGP or igp^^PN^-

^PY^^V03,03,000^T0010igp^Digp^D^^PN^-

descend.ex2

Direct Printer Commands

Direct Printer Commands
Purpose

Sends control characters for special purposes directly to the Line
Printer Plus emulation.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format

See Table 6.

NOTE: The commands in Table 6 are not supported on L7032 printers.

Table 6. Direct Printer Commands
Direct Command

Hex Code Sent to the Printer

^”

03 (see note below)

^’

NOTE: Do not use the ^# direct printer command to send hex 03 to the
printer at the start of a line. This is to avoid confusion with the
Compressed Print command described on page 47.
Comments
A detailed understanding of Line Printer Plus function and
response to the control characters is recommended. Refer to the
Line Printer Plus Programmer’s Reference Manual for information
regarding the hex codes for various printer commands.
The Graphics Mode must be entered before sending the direct
printer commands. However, do not use these commands within
an extended graphics command sequence.
Example

The following example command sequence sends hex 05 to the
printer, initiating the printer plot command to plot the data.

^PY^^% data ^-

Chapter

Command Codes

Dot Slew
Purpose

Changes the vertical print position by specifying a number of dot
rows to advance the paper from the current print position.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format

(cc) D n (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Dot Slew command. Enter D.

Specifies the number of dot rows to advance (slew)
the paper from the current print position. Enter a
two-digit number of dot rows ranging from 01
through 99. For example, enter 05 to slew 5 dot
rows, 21 to slew 21 dot rows.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The (cc)Dn Dot Slew command dot values are interpreted as 60
dpi P-Series dots.

Duplication, Horizontal

Purpose

Activates horizontal duplication.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) S # spacing (cc)- data (cc)S (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Horizontal Duplication command. Enter S to
turn on the horizontal duplication feature.

Specifies the number of horizontal duplications to
print. Enter a two-digit number ranging from 00
through 99 to specify the number of copies.

spacing

Represents the amount of spacing, in tenth inches,
between each duplication. The spacing amount
should include a sufficient space to contain the
complete printed result of the duplicated command
sequence plus space for a margin between copies.
The right edge of the last duplication must not
exceed selected page width. Enter a two-digit
number ranging from 00 through 99 to specify a 0.0
through 9.9 inch spacing for the copies.

Duplication, Horizontal

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator
representing an end to the data. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
- to end the command sequence.

data

(cc)S (cc)-

Mandatory Horizontal Duplication command
sequence terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by S, another
SFCC, and - to end terminate the Horizontal
Duplication command sequence.

Comments
The S command operates as a toggle. The first S command
enables horizontal duplication, the second S command disables
horizontal duplication, the third S command enables duplication,
and so on.
All data following the first S command repeats the number of
times specified until the second S command is encountered.
Copies are produced across the page as many times as
requested or until the page width is reached. Any duplications
that would print beyond column 132 are lost and cause an
Element Off Page error (Error 48).
Example

The following sample command illustrates horizontal duplication.
This extended graphics command sequence consists of a
Standard Alphanumeric command using the letters "IGP" printed
at a height of 0.2". "IGP" is being duplicated 5 times with a gap of
0.8" between each duplication (0.6" space plus a 0.2" margin
between each duplication).

^PY^^S05,08^-^M02,02,000IGP^-^S^^PN^-

Chapter

Command Codes

Duplication, Horizontal (Version II)
This command performs the same function as (cc)S described on page 54.
The IREPH command can also operate within an Extended Graphics
command. You must enable the Free Format command for this command to
work properly.
Purpose

Defines both the number of times data is horizontally duplicated
(repeated), and the horizontal spacing between each duplication.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected or
Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IREPH, n, spacing (cc)G data (cc)IREPE
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IREPH,

The horizontal duplication command. Enter
IREPH,.

Represents the number of times to duplicate the
data horizontally. Enter a value which allows the
characters to print within the horizontal page
boundaries. Enter a value ranging from 1 through
99.

spacing

Represents the amount of horizontal spacing
between the start of each set of repeated data.
Enter up to three numbers.
The first and second digits represent horizontal
tenths, and the third digit represents horizontal
dots. If less than three digits are entered, zeros are
automatically inserted from left to right.
Example:
001
012
123

(cc)G

The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by G to
terminate the IREPH command.

data

Represents the data to be repeated. Enter any valid
VGL Graphics Mode command. Specific command
sequences are input as part of the Horizontal
Duplication data. These commands are then
repeated as specified in the Horizontal Duplication
command.
One Horizontal Duplication command can be
contained within a Horizontal Duplication
command. The total number of characters within
the command sequence (including all repetitions)
must be 256 characters less than the maximum
size of the input buffer.

Duplication, Vertical

(cc)IREPE

The horizontal duplication end command. Enter the
SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately
followed by IREPE to end the horizontal duplication
command.

Comments
Multiple IREPH/IREPE duplication loops can be used in a form
and can also be nested. Vertical duplication loops (IREPV/
IREPE) can also be used in conjunction with IREPH. Each
IREPH must have a corresponding IREPE.
Example

The following command repeats "IGP" 3 times horizontally using
the IREPH, command, separating each set of "IGP" with 5 tenths
plus 2 dots of horizontal spacing.

^PY^-^F^^IREPH,3,52^G^M02,02,000IGP^-^IREPE
^O^-^PN^-

Duplication, Vertical
Purpose

Prints multiple copies of data vertically down the page.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) R # (cc)- data (cc)Z(cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Vertical Duplication command. Enter
R to activate vertical repetition.

Specifies the number of times to repeat the data,
that is, specifies the number of copies to print.
Enter a four digit number ranging from 0000
through 9999 to specify the number of copies.

(cc)-

Mandatory Graphics Mode CR terminator. Enter
the SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately
followed by - to end terminate the initial Vertical
Duplication command sequence.

data

Chapter

Command Codes

One Vertical Duplication command can be
contained within a Vertical Duplication command.
The total number of characters within the command
sequence (including all repetitions) must be 256
characters less than the maximum size of the input
buffer.
(cc)Z(cc)-

Mandatory Vertical Duplication command
sequence terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by Z, another
SFCC, and - to end terminate the Vertical
Duplication command sequence. If a Vertical
Duplication command is nested within a Vertical
Duplication command, this single terminator
sequence terminates both Vertical Duplication
commands.
If Auto Increment/Decrement command parameters
are used with this command (page 59), this
terminator causes all the numeric fields to increase/
decrease (as specified by the Auto Increment/
Decrement command) at the end of the repeat
pass. If the (cc)ZO(cc)- (alpha O) terminator is
used, all numeric fields are updated sequentially
within the repeat pass. See “Auto Increment/
Decrement Vertical Duplication” on page 59 for
more information.

Example

The following example illustrates the Vertical Duplication
command. Alphanumeric commands, line elements, and
standard graphics commands are repeated 3 times down the
page. (The ^*^* causes the two line feeds on which the data is
repeated. See the Free Format commands discussed on pages
99 and 102.)

^PY^-^F^^R0003^-^M03,03,000A Line^LS0100,0010^^M^D^S4compressed characters^^M^D^S1Repeated 3 times^*^*^Z^^O^-^PN^-

vertdu

Duplication, Vertical

Auto Increment/Decrement Vertical Duplication
Purpose

Updates increment and decrement data within a Vertical
Duplication command sequence (page 57).

Format

(cc) Y start# +/- amount (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Auto Increment/Decrement
command. Enter Y to activate automatic update of
repeated numeric data fields.

start#

Represents the starting numeric data to automatically update. Enter the starting number of the
numeric data field ranging from 1 through 12 digits.
This number is the first numeric data printed and
subsequently updated according to the +/- and
amount parameters. Spaces are converted to zeros
when necessary.

+/-

Specifies increment or decrement updates to the
numeric data. Enter + to increment the data or
enter - to decrement the data.

amount

Represents the numeric amount to update the data
field. Enter the update amount ranging from 1
through 12 digits. Spaces are converted to zeros
when necessary.

(cc)G

The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by G to terminate the auto increment/decrement command.

The terminator used in the Vertical Duplication command
determines when each inner auto increment field of a nested
repeat sequence is updated (incremented/decremented). If the
(cc)Z(cc)- Vertical Duplication command terminator is used, each
inner field is updated at the end of the repeat pass. For example,
four fields within a repeat pass would all be updated together at
the end of each repeat pass. If, however, the (cc)ZO(cc)- Vertical
Duplication command terminator is used in the same example,
each of the four inner fields is updated sequentially within the
overall repeat pass.

Chapter

Command Codes

Example 1 The following example illustrates the Vertical Duplication
command with Auto Increment/Decrement of numeric fields
updated at the end of the repeat pass. (The ^* on the fourth line
causes a line feed on which the second set of Invoice data is
printed. See the Free Format commands discussed on pages 99
and 102.)
^PY^-^F^^R0002^-^M02,02,000Invoice
^J010^LS0106,0004^J000 #^Y5010+5^G^^R0004^-^M01,01,010Part #^Y130+2^G^-^*^Z^^O^-^PN^-

Duplication, Vertical

Example 2 The following example illustrates the same Vertical Duplication
command but uses the different terminator for Auto Increment/
Decrement of numeric fields updated sequentially within the
repeat pass. (The ^* on the fourth line causes a line feed on
which the second set of Invoice data is printed. Refer to the Free
Format commands discussed on pages 99 and 102.)
^PY^-^F^^R0002^-^M02,02,000Invoice
^J010^LS0100,0004^J000 #^Y5010+5^G^^R0004^-^M01,01,010Part #^Y130+2^G^-^*^ZO^^O^-^PN^-

(cc)Y can be used in conjunction with IREPV and IREPH to
achieve auto increment/decrement on both vertical duplication
and horizontal duplication for the data, including numeric,
alphabetical and barcode data. (cc)Y can also work with (cc)R
vertical duplication command (page 57), but NOT with (cc)S
horizontal duplication command (page 54). If the data is nonalphanumeric (except for space characters) and you are using
the (cc)Y command with the (cc)R Vertical Duplication command,
an error occurs. If the data exceeds 12 digits in length, an error
also occurs.

Chapter

Command Codes

Example

The following example illustrates the vertical/horizontal
duplication commands using IREPV/IREPH.

^PY^-^F^^IREPV,2,0050^G
^IREPH,3,200^G
^M0202010^YABCD+1^G^^M0202010^Y0001-2^G^^M0202010^Y000A1+3^G^^M0505010^IBARC,C39,E,^YCAV+1^G^^IREPE^^IREPE^^O^-^PN^-

Duplication, Vertical (Version II)

Duplication, Vertical (Version II)
This command performs an enhanced function of the (cc)R command
described on page 57. The IREPV command can also operate within an
Extended Graphics command, and vertical spacing between each duplication
can be specified. You must enable the Free Format command for this
command to work properly.
Purpose

Defines both the number of times data is vertically duplicated
(repeated), and the vertical spacing between each duplication.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IREPV, n, spacing (cc)G data (cc)IREPE
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

IREPV,

The vertical duplication command. Enter IREPV,.

Represents the number of times to duplicate the
data vertically. Enter a value ranging from 1
through 9999.

spacing

Represents the amount of vertical spacing to
separate each set of repeated data. Enter up to
four numbers.
The first, second and third digits represent vertical
tenths, and the fourth digit represents vertical dots.
If less than four digits are entered, zeros are
automatically inserted from left to right.
Example:
0001
0012
0123
1234

(cc)G

The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by G to
terminate the IREPV command.

data

Represents the data to be repeated. Enter any valid
VGL Graphics Mode command. Specific command
sequences are input as part of the Vertical
Duplication data. These commands are then
repeated as specified in the Vertical Duplication
command.
One Vertical Duplication command can be
contained within a Vertical Duplication command.
The total number of characters within the command
sequence (including all repetitions) must be 256
characters less than the maximum size of the input
buffer.

Chapter

Command Codes

(cc)IREPE

The vertical duplication end command. Enter the
SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately
followed by IREPE to end the vertical duplication
command.

Comments
Multiple IREPV/IREPH duplication loops can be used in a form
and can also be nested. Horizontal duplication loops (IREPH/
IREPE) can also be used in conjunction with IREPV. Each IREPV
must have a corresponding IREPE.
Example

The following command repeats "IGP" 3 times vertically using the
IREPV, command, separating each line with 3 tenths plus 4 dots
of vertical spacing.

^PY^-^F^^IREPV,3,4^G^M02,02,000IGP^-^IREPE
^O^-^PN^-

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form Commands
Purpose

Permits an entire form or label to be sent to VGL with variable
data entered into specific locations on each form.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphic Command selected

Format

(cc) B (cc)- data (cc)t
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

Specifies the Dynamic Form command. Enter B to
begin dynamic forms.

(cc)-

The Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by - to terminate the initial Dynamic Form command
sequence.

data

Represents the dynamic form data. Any text,
graphics command sequences, or Dynamic Form
Field Length, Copy or Repeat commands are
entered as part of the data. (See Comments.)
This is not the dynamic data for the variable fields;
this data represents all information required for the
boilerplate form.

(cc)t

Terminates the complete Dynamic Form command
sequence. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by ] or } to
terminate the Dynamic Form processing. The
dynamic data for the variable fields can be sent
following termination of the completed Dynamic
Form command.

Comments
Dynamic form commands allow a boilerplate form to be
transmitted once. The data that changes with each form is
provided in the variable data fields after the Dynamic Form
command is terminated. Variable fields can include barcode data
fields.
The Dynamic Form commands consist of the primary Dynamic
Form command referenced above, which enables dynamic form
generation, and three additional commands listed below. These
additional commands are added to the primary command
according to your particular dynamic form requirements:
•Dynamic Form Field Length (defined on page 67) specifies the
number of data bytes expected to fill a variable data field.
•Dynamic Form Copy Fields (defined on page 69) copies fields
within the form.
•Dynamic Form Repeat Form (defined on page 71) repeats the
complete form.

Chapter

Command Codes

Dynamic Form Special Command Definitions
The graphics carriage return, line feed, form feed, vertical tab, and universal
terminator commands are interpreted differently when used within the
Dynamic Form commands. These interpretations are described below.
(CR) Carriage Return (^-) - Fills the remainder of the current dynamic field
with spaces. If this is the only input, the entire field is filled with spaces.
(LF) Line Feed (^*) - Fills (pads) the remainder of the current dynamic field
and all remaining dynamic fields in the form with spaces. If this is the only
input, the entire field is filled with spaces. If used within a dynamic copy
command, all fields to the end of the current copy are filled with spaces. If
used with a dynamic repeat command, all remaining fields of all copies are
filled with spaces.
(FF) Form Feed (^,) - Performs the same function as LF, except for use
within a dynamic copy command. If used within a dynamic copy command, all
fields to the end of copy are filled with spaces, and all fields continue to fill
with spaces until the copy count is complete.
(VT) Vertical Tab (^+) - Causes the remainder of the current dynamic field to
be ignored. No data is printed in the current dynamic field if this is the only
input in the field.
(G) Universal Terminator (^G) - Terminates the dynamic Form function and
completes the current graphics command sequence.
Example

Examples using the Dynamic Data command features are
provided following the discussion of each command.

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form: Field Length
Purpose

Assigns a field length to each variable field in a boilerplate
dynamic form.

Format

(cc) t length (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Dynamic Form Field Length
command. Enter [ or { to designate a field length
follows.

length

Represents the field length. Enter a three-digit
number to inform VGL how many data bytes are
expected to fill a certain variable data field. Each
variable data field on the form must have an associated field length.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

Comments
This Dynamic Form: Field Length command is supplied as part of
the data within the Dynamic Form command. The length is
assigned to a variable field at the current position based on all
other commands and data within the Dynamic Form command.
For example, if alphanumeric commands are input followed by a
tab followed by this length command, the length is assigned
beginning at the position after the alphanumeric command and
tab are executed.
Each variable field in a boilerplate dynamic form must have a field
length assigned. The field length specifies how many data bytes
are required to fill the field. For example, a form might have a
variable field called "quantity" which could be specified as three
data bytes. VGL would then expect three data bytes supplied
dynamically to fill that field.
Following the completed Dynamic Form command, the data is
sent and the forms are processed. The data is sent in the order of
the variable fields. The first data sent fills the first variable field;
the second data sent fills the second variable field, etc. The data
must be the same length as the field or special dynamic form
commands (CR, LF, FF explained on page 66) must be used to
fill the field.

Chapter

Command Codes

Example

This example illustrates the Dynamic Form command. Three
variable fields are used: one each for Price, Quantity, and Total.
Following the command sequence, the dynamic data is sent to fill
the variable fields. The special use of the CR command for
dynamic forms is shown in the example with the dynamic data.

^PY^-^F^^B^-^M02,02,000Price^T0220^[005^^M02,02,002Quantity^T0220^[002^^M02,02,002Total^T0220^[006^-^*^*^]
$1.5004$6.00^$1.0525$26.25
$8.950^^G
^O^-^PN^Three sets of dynamic data in this example are defined as follows:
1. $1.50 Price, 04 Quantity, $6.00 Total, CR to fill with spaces
2. $1.05 Price, 25 Quantity, $26.25 total
3. $8.95 Price, 0 Quantity, CR to fill with spaces
4. End of data (^G)

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form: Copy Fields
Purpose

Duplicates specific fields or data within a boilerplate dynamic
form.

Format

(cc) C # copydata (cc)Z(cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Dynamic Form Copy Fields
command. Enter C to copy fields within the form.

Specifies the number of copies. Enter a two-digit
number to inform VGL how many copies of the
copy data to make within the form.

copydata

Represents the copy data. Any text or graphics
command sequences (including Dynamic Form
Field Length) are entered as part of the data.
This is not the dynamic data for the variable fields;
this data represents all information to copy within
the boilerplate form.

(cc)Z(cc)-

Terminates the copy sequence. Enter the SFCC for
your VGL configuration immediately followed by Z,
another SFCC, and - or another valid graphics
command mnemonic to terminate the Dynamic
Form Copy Fields sequence.

Comments
The dynamic copy command is supplied as part of the data within
the Dynamic Form command. Do not use this command with the
Dynamic Form: Repeat command (page 71).
The LF and FF commands (as previously described on page 66)
have an additional meaning when used with Dynamic Form:
Copy Fields commands.
Example

The following example illustrates the Dynamic Form: Copy Fields
command. As in the previous example (page 68), the same three
variable fields are used for Price, Quantity, and Total, except that
the Price and Quantity fields are copied. Following the Dynamic
Form command sequence, the dynamic data is sent to fill the
variable fields. The special use of the LF command for dynamic
form copy fields is shown in the example with the dynamic data.

^PY^-^F^^B^-^M02,02,000Price^T0160^[005^*^*
^C02^M01,01Quantity^T0100^[002
^M01,01^T0170Total^T0250^[006^^*^Z^-^*^*^]
$1.5004$06.00
10$15.00
$1.0525$26.25
50$52.50
$8.9502$17.90
^*
$8.95^,

Chapter

Command Codes

^G
^O^-^PN^The dynamic data in the above example is defined below.
1. $1.50 Price, 04 Quantity, $06.00 Total
2. 10 Quantity, $15.00 Total
3. $1.05 Price, 25 Quantity, $26.25 Total
4. 50 Quantity, $52.50 Total
5. $8.95 Price, 02 Quantity, $17.90 Total
6. End of data in these fields (^*)
7. $8.95 Price, 0 Quantity, and FF to fill all fields with spaces until copy
count is complete.
8. End of data (^G)

dyn.

Dynamic Form Commands

Dynamic Form: Repeat
Purpose

Repeats (duplicates) an entire form within a boilerplate dynamic
form.

Format

(cc) R formdata (cc)Z(cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Dynamic Form: Repeat command.
Enter R to repeat the boilerplate form.

formdata

Represents the dynamic form data. Any text,
graphics command sequences, or dynamic form
field length, are entered as part of the data.
This is not the dynamic data for the variable fields;
this data represents all information required for the
boilerplate form to be repeated. The number of
copies of the form is specified as part of the
dynamic data sequence after the dynamic form is
processed.

(cc)Z(cc)-

Terminates the repeat sequence. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
Z, another SFCC, and - or another valid graphics
command mnemonic to terminate the Dynamic
Form Copy Fields sequence.

Comments
The Dynamic Form: Repeat command is supplied as the first
input of the data parameter within the Dynamic Form command.
Do not use this command with the Dynamic Form: Copy Fields
command (page 69).
The LF and FF commands (as previously described on page 66)
have an additional meaning when used with Dynamic Form:
Repeat commands.
When the data is supplied, the first parameter becomes a fourdigit repeat number field. For example, 0003 before the first
dynamic data byte specifies three repeated forms with the data.
The repeat number field must be supplied with each set of data
when the Dynamic Form: Repeat command is used. If only one
copy of the form is required, enter 0001 as the repeat number.

Chapter

Command Codes

Example

This example illustrates the Dynamic Form: Repeat command.
The Price field repeats with a five-digit field length. Following the
Dynamic Form command sequence, the dynamic data with the
repeat quantities is sent. The special use of the CR command for
dynamic forms is shown in the example with the dynamic data.

^PY^-^F^^B^-^R^-^M00,00,000^T0160Price^[005^^*^*^Z^-^]
0003$1.50
0002$1.0^0001$8.95
0000^G
^O^-^PN^The dynamic data in this example is defined as:
1. 3 copies with $1.50 Price
2. 2 copies with $1.0 Price, CR to fill with spaces
3. 1 copy with $8.95 Price
4. No data (^G)

dyn.e

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)
Purpose

To use the software-controlled vertical formatter which allows you
to program frequently used lines on forms and documents for
efficient printing processes when merging operations (such as
invoicing or payrolling).

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

See Table 7.

NOTE: The codes in Table 7 are not supported on L7032 printers.

Table 7. EVFU Command Codes
EVFU Code

Command

Start Load

Channel: 1 (TOF)

Channel 2

Channel 3

Channel 4

Channel 5

Channel 6

Channel 7

Channel 8

Channel 9

Channel 10

Channel 11

Channel 12

Channel 13

Channel 14

End Load

Chapter

Command Codes

Comments
By flagging each line to be printed, the EVFU automatically
moves the printhead to the identified lines. The EVFU provides
14 channels (line identification codes) to identify up to 132 lines
on a form. For complete EVFU information, refer to your Line
Printer Plus Programmer's Reference Manual.
The EVFU is loaded with a program of line identification codes,
one code for each line of the form. The program includes a Start
Load code to initiate the load routine, a series of line identification
codes, and an End Load code. After the memory is loaded, a line
identification code occurring in the data stream causes the EVFU
to slew to the identified line. To clear the EVFU memory, send a
Start Load code with no channel codes or End Load code.
The Start Load, End Load, and Channel Code commands are
listed in Table 7. A sample EVFU form is shown in Table 8.

Table 8. Sample EVFU Form

Form Data

Company:

Item:

Color:

Quantity:

P/O Number:

EVFU Load
Program

EVFU
Command
Code

Start Load

Ch 2

Ch 1

Ch 2

Ch 3

Ch 2

Ch 4

Ch 2

Ch 5

Ch 2

Ch 6

Ch 2

Form Line #

Timmy’s Toys

Tricycle

Red

TT-1203

Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)

Table 8. Sample EVFU Form

Form Data

Date:

12/24/86

Form Line #

EVFU Load
Program

EVFU
Command
Code

Ch 2

Ch 7

Ch 2

End Load

The format for the form definition program sent from the host computer is as
follows:
1. The EVFU Start Load code (^>) is sent first. VGL must be in the Graphics
Mode to load and use the EVFU in the Graphics Mode.
2. The Channel 2 code (^1) is sent twice to assign the first two lines of the
form as fillers. Filler lines are not called by the print program. The same
channel code can be used to assign all filler lines of the form.
3. The Channel 1 code (^0), the top-of-form (TOF) code, is sent to assign
form line number 3. This is the first line of the form with print data. In the
sample form, this line is used for company name information. (Alternately,
the TOF code could be assigned to the first line of the form and a unique
channel code assigned to line 3.)
4. The Channel 2 code is again sent four times to assign line numbers 4
through 7 as fillers.
5. The Channel 3 code (^2) is sent to assign line number 8. In the sample
form, this line is used for item information.
6. The Channel 2 code is sent to assign line number 9 as a filler.
7. The Channel 4 code (^3) is sent to assign line number 10. In the sample
form, this line is used for color information.
8. The Channel 2 code is sent twice to assign line numbers 11 and 12 as a
fillers.
9. The Channel 5 code (^4) is sent to assign line number 13. In the sample
form, this line is used for quantity information.
10. The Channel 2 code is sent twice to assign line numbers 14 and 15 as a
fillers.
11. The Channel 6 code (^5) is sent to assign line number 16. In the sample
form, this line is used for purchase order number information.
12. The Channel 2 code is sent twice to assign line numbers 17 and 18 as a
fillers.
13. The Channel 7 code (^6) is sent to assign line number 19. In the sample
form, this line is used for date information.
14. The Channel 2 code is sent to assign line number 20 as a filler.
15. The EVFU End Load code (^?) is sent last to terminate the memory load
routine.

Chapter

Command Codes

After the EVFU is loaded, sending one of the EVFU codes in the data stream
(or as a line terminator) causes the printer to slew the paper to the line
assigned to the EVFU code sent.

Emphasized Print
Purpose

Selects emphasized (bold) character printing.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ E (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Emphasized Print command. Enter E
and all characters on the line are emphasized.
Emphasized print is automatically reset upon
receipt of the line terminator.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
Emphasized print is available when VGL is in the Graphics Mode.
Emphasized print is a line-by-line print attribute; it is selected
once and all characters in the line are emphasized. The @E
command must be used prior to any printable data in the line, and
it is automatically reset when a line terminator is received. When
printing text, this command produces the same output as the
Dark Print command.
Example

The following example illustrates changing character type from
the standard characters to emphasized characters.

^PY^Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode^*
^@E^-Emphasized characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOP^*^*
^PN^-

Emulation Switch

Emulation Switch
NOTE: The Emulation Switch command is not supported on L7032 printers.
Purpose

Switches to a different emulation.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IEMUL, des (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IEMUL,

The emulation switch command. Enter IEMUL,.

des

Enter PGL to switch to PGL emulation. Enter PPI1
to switch to ZGL emulation.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments Once the system is switched to a new emulation, VGL will be
reset as the default. There is no need to exit the graphic mode
separately.

Font Load
Purpose

Load binary TrueType font (.ttf) or Intellifont (.sf) into RAMDISK
or flash memory.

Mode

Standard Graphics mode

Format

(cc)ILOAD, name, size [,DISK] (cc)G data (cc)G(cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

ILOAD,

The font load command. Enter ILOAD,.

name

Specify associated binary TrueType font or
Intellifont data by name. Enter the name of the font,
including its extension. The maximum length of the
name is 8 characters and the maximum length of
the extension is 3 characters. For example,
93952.sf specifies Courier Bold (Intellifont) and
arial.ttf would represent Arial (TrueType). The
name is used by (cc) IFONT,N command.

size

Enter the size, in bytes, of the binary TrueType font
or Intellifont data.

DISK

Optional parameter to store the binary data in flash
memory. Enter DISK. By default, the binary data is
stored in RAMDISK when DISK is not specified.

(cc)G

The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by G to
terminate the ILOAD, command.

Chapter

Command Codes

data

The binary TrueType font or Intellifont data to be
stored in memory.

(cc)G

The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by G to
terminate the binary font data parameter.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comment When loading fonts to RAMDISK, the printer files will not be
saved to RAMDISK when the printer is powered off. When
loading fonts to flash memory, the printer files will be saved when
the printer is powered off. Both RAMDISK and flash memory
support file operations such as saving, reading, and deleting files.

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Purpose

Selects a default font.

Mode

Standard Graphics or Graphics with an Extended Graphics
Command selected. When this command is executed as an
Extended Graphics command, descender mode automatically
turns on.

Format

(cc) IFONT,S, n (cc)G
or
(cc) IFONT,N, name (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFONT,

Specifies the IFONT command. Enter IFONT,.

S,n

Represents the selected font value. Enter S,.
Replace n with a value ranging from 1 through 13,
or 100 or 101, according to the IFONT values
shown in Table 9 or as shown in the Font Values
section below.

N,name

Represents the selected TrueType font or Intellifont
(AGFA) by name. Enter N, and the name of the font
with its extension. The maximum length of the
name is 8 characters and the maximum length of
the extension is 3 characters. For example,
93952.sf specifies Courier Bold (AGFA) and
arial.ttf represents Arial (TrueType). If this
parameter is used, then IFONT S, should not be
used.

(cc)G

The universal terminator. Enter the SFCC for your
VGL configuration immediately followed by G to terminate the IFONT,S, command.

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Table 9. IFONT, Values
Font # (n)

Font Description

Draft 10 cpi

Draft 12 cpi

Draft 15 cpi

Draft 7.5 cpi

NLQ 10 cpi

NLQ 12 cpi

NLQ 13.33 cpi

NLQ 15 cpi

NLQ 17.65 cpi

OCR-A Size 1 10 cpi

OCR-B Size 1 10 cpi

Draft 10 cpi

100

20 cpi

101

24 cpi

xxxxx

AGFA font or Bitmap font

NOTE: For thermal printers a Letter Gothic font at the higher quality NLQ is
always used.
Comments
When this command is used within an Extended Graphics
command, the default font is selected for Extended Graphics
printing and the four orientations of the Alphanumerics command
(page 32) are available. When this command is used in a
Standard Graphics command, the default font is selected for
standard printing only.

Chapter

Command Codes

Font Values
The ^IFONT,S command is used to select proportional fonts. The following list
indicates each of the font values and how they are used:
0 - 199

These values are already defined. When the
^IFONT command is received with one of
these values, it selects the standard font
(Letter Gothic) and selects the CPI (as
shown in Table 9).

89001 - 89003

These values select an Printronix bitmap font
on the flash memory. The least significant
digit indicates which font is selected (for
example 89001 selects bitmap font 1).
See “Bitmap Fonts” below.

90000 - 99999

These values select a Printronix proportional
font, as described below.

Font Selection
Fonts are selected using the ^IFONT command, as follows:
^IFONT,S,XXXXX^G
The parameter XXXXX indicates the font selected. The rest of the command
is parsed and acted upon based upon the font number selected.
^IFONT,N,name^G
Represents the selected TrueType font or Intellifont (AGFA) by name. Enter
N, and the name of the font with its extension. The maximum length of the
name is 8 characters and the maximum length of the extension is 3
characters.

Bitmap Fonts
Font values of 89001 - 89003 select a bitmap font. The size of the font is
determined by the font. The font on the flash memory is in the HP® PCL®
Bitmap format. The file names for the fonts are CUSTOMx.FNT (where x is
the font number from 1 through 3).

Font, Selecting Default (Version II)

Printronix/AGFA Fonts
Font values of 90000 - 99999 select an AGFA font. When using an AGFA or
TrueType font, additional optional parameters are available to modify the font.
The syntax for selecting an AGFA font is:
^IFONT,S,XXXXX [,BOLD] [,RSLANT / ,LSLANT] [POINT [,WIDTH]]^G
The syntax for selecting an AGFA or TrueType font by name is:
^IFONT,N,name [,BOLD] [,RSLANT / ,LSLANT] [POINT [,WIDTH]]^G
The parameter XXXXX indicates the font to be selected, by number. If the font
number is an AGFA font (value 90000 - 99999), then it selects the desired
AGFA font, and also interprets the optional parameters. If a bitmap font is
selected (value 89001 - 89003), then the font is selected, but no optional
parameters are allowed. The name parameter indicates the font to be
selected, by name (e.g. “arial.ttf”)
If the ,BOLD parameter is specified, the font is printed in bold. If the ,RSLANT
or ,LSLANT parameter is specified, the font is printed slanted to the left or
right (pseudo-italics).
If the POINT parameter is specified, it selects the height (point size) of the
text. This is a numeric value in 1/4 points (1/288"). In addition if the POINT
parameter is specified a WIDTH parameter may also be specified. If given, it
is in 1/4 points (or 1/288"). If it is 0 or is not given, the standard aspect ratio is
used.
The file name on the flash memory for the AGFA fonts is XXXXX.SF, where
XXXXX is the font number.

Pass-through Mode
If the font is selected in standard graphics mode, it applies to all text in
standard graphics mode. In addition, this font applies to text printed when
outside graphics mode (i.e. after VGL is terminated with the ^PN^- command).
If the UNIFORM FONTS menu selection is ENABLED, the typeface also
applies to text within extended graphics mode. If it is DISABLED, the standard
font is used within extended graphics mode, and returns to the selected font
when the graphic pass is terminated.

Extended Graphic Mode
If the font is selected when in extended graphics mode, the font selected is
the selected font for this graphics pass. If the UNIFORM FONTS selection is
ENABLED, it also affects the typeface used for standard graphics mode text
and future graphic passes. If the UNIFORM FONTS selection is DISABLED, it
does not affect the font for standard graphics mode text or future graphic
passes.

Chapter

Command Codes

Examples
The following examples illustrate how to select a font using the IFONT,S, and
IFONT,N, formats.
Example 1. To print “This is Courier font” in Courier font face:
^PY^-^M0202000^IFONT,S,93952^GThis is Courier font^-^PN^Example 2. To print “This is TrueType font” in Arial font face:
^PY^-^M0202000^IFONT,N,arial.ttf^GThis is TrueType font^-^PN^-

Fonts, Rotatable
Purpose

Using special parameter values within any of the four
alphanumerics commands described on page 32, you can specify
four different fonts.

Mode

Normal resolution Graphics with an Extended Graphics
Command selected.

Format

(cc) expand font jus data (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

expand

Represents one of the alphanumeric command
mnemonics: Enter M for horizontal, V for clockwise,
E for counterclockwise, or U for inverted.

font

Represents the four-digit font parameter value
which selects the font. Font parameter values are
shown in Table 10.

jus

Normal Resolution:
Defines vertical justification (position) for character
printing in tenth inches and dot rows. Enter a threedigit value ranging from 000 through 999 to define
the printing location down from the starting position
of the command sequence. The first two digits
specify 0.1 through 9.9 inches downward justification; the third digit specifies an additional 0 through
9 dot rows of downward justification. The decimal
point between the first two digits is automatically
understood by VGL and the third digit is automatically interpreted as dot rows.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of the form in
thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal
value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define
a horizontal length of 0.000 inch to 99.999 inches.
VGL automatically understands the decimal
between the second and third digits.

NOTE: If your data to be printed begin with a number (not a character), then
you must complete the field; otherwise, VGL assumes the number is
a digit in the field value.

Fonts, Rotatable

data

The data characters for printing in the rotatable
font.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
Compressed Print Density Fonts provide six other fonts with
higher density print characteristics. See “Fonts, Compressed
Print Density” on page 85.
Each of the three pitches, 10 cpi, 12 cpi, and 15 cpi (measured in
characters per inch, cpi) produce non-expandable characters 0.1inch high and 3, 4, or 5 dot columns wide with a one-dot column
intercharacter spacing.
The 7 cpi font produces non-expandable characters 0.2-inch high
and 0.15-inch wide with a 2-dot column intercharacter spacing at
approximately 7 cpi.
You can select any specific font from any of the four
alphanumerics commands using the Font Parameter (special
combinations of the alphanumeric command height and width
parameters) as described in Table 10.
The Rot. Char Size option setting (from the front panel menu)
determines if rotated (clockwise / counter-clockwise), expanded
characters have a different size than an unrotated character with
the same size parameters ("Adjusted") or the same size ("Not
Adjusted"). The previous VGL version always operated in the
Adjusted mode.
The Adjusted mode reflects rotating a fixed 5x7 cell character on
a 60x72 dpi, non-symmetrical printer. The Not Adjusted mode
reflects rotating on a symmetrical dpi printer.

Table 10. Rotatable Fonts

Font Size

Impact Printer
Character Dimensions*
(Vert X Horiz)

7 cpi

14 dots (V) X 8 dots

00,00

10 cpi

7 dots (V) X 5 dots

01,01

12 cpi

7 dots (V) X 4 dots

00,01

15 cpi

7 dots (V) X 3 dots

01,00

Alphanumeric Command
Font Parameter Value

* 10, 12, and 15 cpi use an intercharacter spacing of one dot position. The
elongated font uses an intercharacter spacing of two dot positions. Vertical
by horizontal dimensions above are based on the 60 X 72 dpi dots produced
on line matrix printers.

Chapter

Command Codes

Examples The following examples illustrate the available fonts. For each
example, the Graphics Mode command (^PY^-) was previously
sent but not shown.
10 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with
numbers 0-9 in 10 cpi:
^M01,01,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

font.ex1

12 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with
numbers 0-9 in 12 cpi:
^M00,01,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

font.ex2
15 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with
numbers 0-9 in 15 cpi:

^M01,00,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

font.ex3
7 cpi Font - The following command generates the uppercase alphabet with
numbers 0-9 in 7 cpi:

^M00,00,000ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^-

Rotatable Font - The following commands combine rotated fonts with
alphanumeric commands.
^M05,05,000IGP^M01,01,000IGP^-

font.ex5

Fonts, Compressed Print Density

^V03,03,0003 X 3^V01,00,000IGP^-

font.ex6

Fonts, Compressed Print Density
Purpose

Defines the horizontal print density in characters per inch (cpi).

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) S f data (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Compressed Print Density command. Enter S.

Represents the Compressed Print Density font.
Replace f with a value ranging from 1 through 9 to
select the compressed print density font as
described in Table 11. Standard print density is 10
cpi. Each character font is .1-inch high. The font
sizes are illustrated in the examples beginning on
page 87.

data

The data characters for printing in the Compressed
Print Density font.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately
followed by - to end the command sequence.

Chapter

Command Codes

Table 11. Compressed Print Density Font Selection
f

Font Selected

10 cpi

12 cpi

13.33 cpi

15 cpi

17.65 cpi

OCR-A font at 10 cpi

OCR-B font at 10 cpi

12 cpi

15 cpi

Comments
Use Compressed Print Density commands as part of the
Alphanumerics command. Reverse print and rotated commands
are not available with the Compressed Print feature. Characters
selected with this command print only in the standard horizontal
orientation. A Reverse Print or rotated alphanumeric command
specified in the command sequence is ignored.

Fonts, Compressed Print Density

Compressed Print Density Font Examples
The following examples illustrate the commands and print samples which
generate the uppercase alphabet with numbers 0-9 in the available
compressed print density fonts. Notice the height and width parameters of the
alphanumerics command does not apply to the data specified for compressed
print.

f = 1 (10 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S1ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

f = 2 (12 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S2ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

densi

f = 3 (13.33 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S3ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

density

f = 4 (15 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S4ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

density.ex

Chapter

Command Codes

f = 5 (17.65 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S5ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

density.e

f = 6 (OCR-A 10 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S6ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

f = 7 (OCR-B 10 cpi)
^PY^^M03,02,000^S7ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ 0123456789^^PN^-

Form Feed
Purpose

Performs a form feed (hex 0C) function to advance the paper to
the next top of form, or may be used to terminate a graphics
command.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc),
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The graphics FF mnemonic. Enter ,.

Comments
The form feed command functions as a terminator only when
used to terminate a graphics sequence in a graphics command
when Free Format is enabled.
The control panel form feed key will operate differently dependent
on the source of form feed control at the time the key is pressed.
Form feed is controlled by the LP+ and VGL emulation at different
times.

Form Length

Form Length
Purpose

Defines the length of the form in total number of lines.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) L length (cc)or
(cc) H length (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

L or H

The Form Length command. If your VGL is
configured with the PI line enabled, enter L. If your
VGL is configured with the PI line disabled, enter H.

length

Represents the form length in total number of lines.
Enter a two-digit number of total lines on the form
ranging from 01 through 99. For example, enter 05
for a 5-line form length, 21 for a 21-line form length.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The L command is available any time VGL is in the Graphics
Mode. The physical length of the paper for the form is a product
of the total lines per form and the current lines per inch (lpi)
setting for the printer. For example, a typical 66-line form at 6 lpi
is 11 inches long. A 48-line form at 6 lpi is 8 inches long; the
same 48-line form at 8 lpi is 6 inches long.
Form feeds following this command advance the form from the
current print position to the top of the next form.
With the Host Form Length configuration option enabled, the form
length defined by this command sets the physical page length on
the printer.

Chapter

Command Codes

Forms Construction
Purpose

Produces vertical lines inside a box to construct forms.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) LF horz vert h v line1 t line2 t (cc)G(cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Forms Construction command. Enter LF.

horz

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of the form in tenth
inches and dot columns. Enter a three-digit
horizontal length value ranging from 000 through
999 to define a horizontal length of 00.0 through
99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0
through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot
columns of length. VGL automatically understands
the decimal between the second and third digits for
tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth
digit as dot columns. For example, entering 0126
specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-dot column horizontal
length; entering 1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6dot column horizontal length.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of the form in
thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal
value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define
a horizontal length of 0.000 inch through 99.999
inches. VGL automatically understands the decimal
between the second and third digits. The horz field
must be at least twice the value of the thickness of
the vertical sides (v).

vert

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of the form in tenth
inches and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical
length value ranging from 000 through 999 to
define a vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches
and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot rows of length. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits for tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot rows. For
example, entering 0204 specifies a 2.0-inch plus 4dot row vertical length; entering 0242 specifies a
2.4-inch plus 2-dot row vertical length.

Forms Construction

vert

High Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of the form in thousandth
inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from
00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of
0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits. The vert field must be at
least twice the value of the thickness of the
horizontal sides (h).

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal border thickness in dot columns. Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to
specify a horizontal border thickness from 1
through 9 dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal border thickness in
thousandth inches. Enter a number ranging from
000 through 999 to specify a border thickness from
0.000 through 0.999 inch. VGL automatically
understands the decimal before the first digit.

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical border thickness in dot rows.
Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to specify
a vertical border thickness from 1 through 9 dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the vertical border thickness in thousandth
inches. Enter a number ranging from 000 through
999 to specify a border thickness from 0.000
through 0.999 inch. VGL automatically understands
the decimal before the first digit.

line1

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical line position in tenth inches and
dot columns from the form left edge or prior vertical
line right edge. Therefore, the line value for all but
the first vertical line is actually the gap between the
right edge of the previous line and the left edge of
the current line. Enter a three-digit position value
ranging from 000 through 999 to define a position
of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot columns. VGL automatically understands
the decimal between the second and third digits for
tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth
digit as dot columns. For example, entering 0126
specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6-dot column position from
the left edge or last vertical line position; entering
1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column position.

Chapter

Command Codes

line1

High Resolution:
Defines the vertical line position in thousandth
inches from the form left edge or prior vertical line
right edge. The line value for all but the first vertical
line, therefore, is actually the gap between the right
edge of the previous line and the left edge of the
current line. Enter a five-digit position value ranging
from 00000 through 99999 to define a position of
00.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical line thickness in dot columns.
Enter a number ranging from 1 through 9 to specify
a line thickness from 1 through 9 dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the vertical line thickness in thousandth
inches. Enter a number ranging from 000 through
999 to specify a line thickness from .000 inch
through .999 inch.

line2

The line position parameter is entered repeatedly
as needed for the number of lines required in the
form.

The line thickness parameter is entered for each
vertical line position parameter.

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command to end the input of vertical line and
form data.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately
followed by - to end the command sequence.

NOTE: You must supply leading and trailing zeros for all fields.
Comments
The LF command produces vertical lines inside a box using a
single command sequence. Forms are positioned by the
parameters or commands of an alphanumerics command
sequence (such as horizontal tabs, the justification parameter,
etc.). Therefore, one of the alphanumerics commands must
precede an LF command.
Using appropriate values for the horizontal and vertical length
parameters constructs a variety of form shapes. The horizontal
and vertical border thickness can also be specified in varying line
thicknesses. Any number of vertical lines can be drawn inside the
form. The position of the vertical line is based on the left edge of
the form or the last vertical line drawn.

Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II)

Example

The following sample command illustrates forms construction in
normal resolution. In addition to enabling the Free Format, an
alphanumerics command was sent for form positioning.

^PY^-^F^^M01,01,000
^LF0500,0320,2,2,0123,1,0200,3,0090,1^G^^O^-^PN^-

Forms, Creating Dynamic (Version II)
NOTE: This command operates similar to the Dynamic Form Commands
described beginning on page 65.
Purpose

Creates a new dynamic form and stores it in memory under a
specified name.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IFORM,C name [,DISK] (cc)G data (cc)]
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFORM,C

The command to create buffered forms. Enter
IFORM,C.

name

Represents the form name. Enter a name up to 15
characters long. Another form in memory by the
same name is overwritten with the new form.

DISK

Optional parameter to store the form in the printer’s
flash memory. Enter DISK.

Chapter

Command Codes

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command to end the input of the form name.

data

The form data. Enter any number of valid Graphics
or Extended Graphics command sequences.

(cc)]

Ends the form and all contents. Enter the specific
SFCC for your VGL configuration followed by the
right bracket ( ] ) to end the form.

Forms, Deleting Dynamic (Version II)
Purpose

Deletes an existing dynamic form stored in memory under a
specified name.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IFORM,D name (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFORM,D

The command to delete the form. Enter IFORM,D.

name

Represents the form name. Enter the form name
exactly as created in the IFORM,C command (page
93).

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command terminator to end the data.

Forms, Executing Dynamic (Version II)
NOTE: This command operates similar to the Dynamic Form Commands
described beginning on page 65.

Purpose

Executes an existing dynamic form stored in memory under a
specified name.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IFORM,E name [,DISK] (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFORM,E

The command to execute the form. Enter
IFORM,E.

name

Represents the form name. Enter the form name
exactly as created in the IFORM,C command
(page 93).

Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II)

DISK

Optional parameter to print the form stored in the
printer’s flash memory.

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command terminator to end the data.

Forms, Listing Dynamic (Version II)
Purpose

Lists all previously created forms including the form size, in bytes,
used by each form name.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IFORM,L (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFORM,L

The command to list the forms in memory. Enter
IFORM,L.

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command terminator to end the data.

Forms, Predefined (Version II)
Purpose

Loads one of three predefined forms from memory (AIAG,
Primary Metals, and Odette). These forms are selected and
completed using the commands and legends described.

Mode

Graphics with standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IFORM,Eformname.QMS (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFORM,Eformname.QMS
The command to retrieve the specified predefined
form. Enter IFORM,Eformname.QMS, where
formname ia AIAG, METALS, or ODETTE.
(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command terminator to end the data.

Comments The IFORM,E command not only loads the desired predefined
form, but provides the means to fill out the form. The following
three examples show the method of specifying the data to be
placed on the forms.

Chapter

Command Codes

Example 1 The following sample command illustrates forms construction
after loading the AIAG form from memory.
^PY^-^F^^IFORM,EAIAG.QMS^G
14015248^+
14015248^+
900^+900^+
046068722
046068722
1284^+1284^+
Acme Motor Company^+
^G
^O^-^PN^-

Forms, Predefined (Version II)

Example 2 The following sample command illustrates forms construction
after loading the Primary Metals form from memory.
^IFORM,EMETALS.QMS^G
D9ABAB37401C^+D9ABAB37401C^+
51403^+51403^+
B1834001^+B1834001^+
06-441001-6075906-441001-60759^+
0072818^+0072818^+
3812038120
3740137401
1^+1^+
.034^+
44.000^+
COIL^+
GA SJ EX 6M61X^
TRIAL COIL^+
REF.4162A-216^+
^G

Chapter

Command Codes

Example 3 The following sample command illustrates forms construction
after loading the Odette form from memory.
^IFORM,EODETTE.QMS^G
ABC CAR CORP^+
DETROIT^+
-005^+
143576451143576451
CHICAGO^
240^+270^+
16-6^+1345935^+
1882^+1882^+
P04^+^+880223
216231627S216231627
8801006^+8801006^+
CHICAGO, IL^+^G

Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II)

Forms, Resetting Dynamic (Version II)
Purpose

Resets dynamic form memory by deleting all forms stored in
memory.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IFORM,R (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IFORM,R

The command to reset forms memory. Enter
IFORM,R.

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command terminator to end the data.

Comments
Standard predefined forms are not deleted from forms memory
with this command. If predefined forms were previously deleted,
they are reinstalled in the forms memory after execution of this
command.

Free Format (Enable/Disable)
Purpose

Enables VGL to ignore all host generated paper motion
commands ranging from hex 00 through 1F.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) F (cc)data
(cc) O (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Free Format command. Enter F.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

data

Represents the data, commands, and all other
codes for processing in Free Format. All VGL
features are available with Free Format enabled.

(cc)O

Turns off the Free Format mode. Following the data
for processing in the Free Format, enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
O (alpha O) to end the Free Format.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Chapter

Command Codes

Comments
Some host systems automatically generate forms control codes
such as CR or LF after a specific number of characters. These
host generated forms control codes could prematurely terminate
the graphics command sequence. The Free Format command
allows VGL to accept incoming data as one continuous stream
even though the data stream may include host generated forms
control codes.
Free Format is available when VGL is in the Graphics Mode.
When enabled, VGL recognizes only the Free Format terminator
commands (Table 12) for forms control until the Free Format is
disabled. If the Graphics Mode is disabled, Free Format
command is automatically disabled.
NOTE: Free Format commands may be used in the normal Graphics Mode
even though Free Format is not enabled. However, when the Free
Format command is enabled, the only valid terminators are the Free
Format commands; others are ignored.

Table 12. Free Format Terminator Commands
Command

Example
^PN^-^F^data
^O^-PN^-

100

Meaning

Line Feed (LF)

Form Feed (FF)

Carriage Return (CR)

Vertical Tab (VT)

EVFU Start Load

EVFU End Load

^ 0-9

EVFU Chs 1 - 10

EVFU Ch 11

EVFU Ch 12

EVFU Ch 13

EVFU Ch 14

The following command enables and disables Free Format in the
Graphics Mode.

Free Format Enable, Non-Graphics

Free Format Enable, Non-Graphics
Purpose

Permits VGL to override host-generated paper motion commands
when not in Graphics Mode.

Mode

Normal

Format

(cc) PF (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Enable Non-Graphics Free Format
command; enter PF.

(cc)-

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - (Graphics
Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Comments
Use the PF command with host systems that send blocks of data
padded with NULs or other control characters that may interfere
with a graphics sequence (such as unformatted LU 3 mode,
coaxial environments). When the Graphics Mode Disable
command (^PN^-) is used to exit the Graphics Mode, it also
automatically terminates the Free Format command and disables
the Ignore Data commands. This can result in unwanted paper
motion if Graphics Mode is exited between forms or labels, since
host-generated line feeds, form feeds, etc., are no longer ignored
by the firmware. (Refer to the Free Format and Ignore Data
commands on pages 99 and 105 for more information on these
functions.)
The PF command must be issued before the Graphics Mode
Enable command (PY). Host-generated line terminators are then
ignored by VGL and only the following standard graphics format
control commands are recognized:
(cc) *Line Feed (hex 0A)
(cc), Form Feed (hex 0C)
(cc)- Carriage Return (hex 0D)
NOTE: When VGL is in the Graphics Mode, the Enable Non-Graphics Free
Format command has no effect on the host data stream. In the
Graphics Mode, use the Free Format and Ignore Data commands
(pages 99 and 105, respectively) to ignore unwanted data.

101

Chapter

Command Codes

Example

The example below illustrates the use of the Enable NonGraphics Free Format command:

^PF^-(LF)(LF)(LF)(LF)^PY^-F^-^M02,02,100 data for form one
^*^X extraneous, unwanted host data^A^M01,01,000 more form one
data ^-(LF)(LF)(LF)(FF)^PN^-^*^*(LF)(LF)
^PY^-^F^-^M02,02,000 data for form two, etc.^In this example, all of the host-generated line and form feed
commands, represented by (LF) and (FF), are ignored and paper
motion is controlled by VGL standard graphics format control
commands (^-), (^*), and (^,), even though Graphics Mode is
exited and reentered between the forms. Between the forms two
standard graphics line feed commands (^*) are used to move the
paper instead of the host-generated (LF) commands. Notice that
after the Graphics Mode is enabled, the Free Format and Ignore
Data commands (^F^-), (^X), and (^A) are used to ignore the
unwanted host data. When all of the labels or forms are
completed, sending Free Format Non-Graphics Disable
command (PO, page 102) returns VGL to the fully-transparent
Normal Mode.

Free Format Disable, Non-Graphics
Purpose

Disables the Non-Graphics Free Format command (PF), which
allows host-generated paper motion when VGL Graphics Free
Format command is disabled.

Mode

Normal

Format

(cc) PO (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the End Non-Graphics Free Format
command; enter PO.

(cc)-

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - (Graphics
Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Comments
Send the PO command anytime after the Graphics Mode Disable
command (PN).
Example
^PO^-

102

The following command disables Free Format in Non-Graphics
Mode.

Graphics Mode Enable

Graphics Mode Enable
Purpose

Enables use of Graphics Mode commands.

Mode

Normal

Format

(cc) PY (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Graphics Mode Enable command;
enter PY.

(cc)-

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - (the
Graphics Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

Comments
Following the PY command, the Graphics Mode commands
(page 26) are available. Once in Graphics mode, you can enter
Extended Graphics/High Resolution Mode. (See page 31 for
more information.)
For the Graphics Mode Enable command to be recognized and
accepted by VGL, the following rules must be followed:
1. If Midline PY is enabled on the printer’s control panel menu,
the Graphics Mode Enable command can be placed
anywhere on a line. If Midline PY is disabled, the Graphics
Mode Enable command must be the first characters of a new
line. See your User’s Manual for more information.
2. The command line must also terminate with a line terminator
(CR, LF, FF, etc.).
3. VGL absorbs all characters between the command and the
line terminator.
Example

The following command enables the Graphics Mode: ^PY^-

103

Chapter

Command Codes

Graphics Mode Disable
Purpose

Exits VGL from Graphics Mode and returns to the Normal Mode.

Mode

Graphics

Format

(cc) PN (cc)-

Example

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Graphics Mode Disable command;
enter PN.

(cc)-

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - (Graphics
Mode CR) or other valid terminator.

The following command disables the Graphics Mode:

^PN^-

Hex Dump
Purpose

Prints all data in hexadecimal code equivalent.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ H 0 (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Hex Dump command. Enter H.

Specifies the Hex Dump parameter. Enter 0 (zero).

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The @H command is available when VGL is in the Graphics
Mode. To disable the hex dump, place the printer offline and
change the hex dump parameter from Enable to Disable. Refer to
your User's Manual for instructions.

104

Ignore Data

Ignore Data
Purpose

Instructs VGL to ignore data until a (cc)A command is received.
(See Comments below.)

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) X data (cc)A
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Ignore Data command. Enter X to
ignore all subsequent characters until the Ignore
Data command is disabled.

data

Represents the data. Any text and characters sent
following the Ignore Data command are not
processed.

(cc)A

Disables Ignore Data. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by A to disable
the Ignore Data feature in order to process
characters.

NOTE: No function occurs if a (cc)A command is used independent of the
(cc)X command.
Comments
Some host systems use fixed record lengths which causes the
end of a line of data in the data stream to be filled (padded) with
characters and spaces. If VGL file on your system contains
padded characters or spaces before the SFCC, this padded data
must be ignored before VGL can operate. When the X command
is sent to ignore data, all data following the command is ignored
until the (cc)A command to ignore data is disabled.

105

Chapter

Command Codes

Interrupt
Purpose

In cases where a single command sequence exceeds the buffer
capacity, an interrupt can be used to break the command
sequence and specify the position where the sequence begins
printing again.

Mode

Graphics with or without an Extended Graphics Command
selected

Format

(cc) I dis (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies the Interrupt command. Enter I.

dis

Normal Resolution:
Defines the interrupt position in tenth inches and
dot columns. Enter a two-digit interrupt position
value ranging from 00 through 99 to define a
position of 0.0 through 9.9 inches and a third digit
ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0 through 9
additional dot columns. VGL automatically
understands the decimal between the first and
second digits for tenth inches and automatically
interprets the third digit as dot columns. For
example, entering 126 specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6dot column interrupt position. Setting the interrupt
position parameter to all zeros processes all data in
the VGL buffer before the next sequence is
initiated.
High Resolution:
Defines the interrupt position in thousandth inches.
Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from 00000
through 99999 to define a vertical justification of
0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.

(cc)-

106

Graphics Mode CR used as a command terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration immediately followed by - to end the command sequence.
NOTE: Only required outside of an Extended
Graphics sequence.

Interrupt

Comments
The VGL buffer holds and can process approximately 64K
characters in a single graphics command sequence, which is
sufficient for most applications. However, infrequent situations
may arise where the command sequence is too large for the VGL
buffer to hold for processing as a single command sequence. In
such cases, use the I command to break the printing command
sequence at a specified position and specify where the sequence
resumes printing. Interrupted command sequences are
processed as if a single command sequence occurred.
The I command can also be used for vertical positioning. Use the
I command to skip to a new vertical position and print the data.
Interrupt commands also can be included in a Vertical Duplication
command sequence.
Like the Alphanumeric commands, the Interrupt command also
enables extended graphics functions, if not already in an
Extended Graphics sequence.
To complete the printing of all interrupted command sequences,
use ^I000^- or no ^I command in the last command sequence.
The last technique is used in the following example.
Example

The following commands illustrate the interrupt function
combined with form construction using tabs and various
character parameters in normal resolution. The Free Format
Enable command is also used.

^PY^-^F^^M01,01,000^LF0550,0200,2,2,0123,3,0150,1,0120,3^I020^^M02,02,005^T0010P/N^T0150DESC^T0300QTY^T0420PRICE^I020^^M01,01,020^T0010M1011^T0150Marbles^T0300200^T0420$2.50^I020^^M01,01,020^T0010J0620^T0150Jacks^T0300035^T0420$1.89^I020^^M01,01,020^T0010S4223^T0150Stickers^T0300100^T0420$ .99^I020^^M01,01,020^T0010C5632^T0150Cards^T0300012^T0420$ .69^I020^^M05,05,084^T0149COMPLETE^^O^-^PN^-

107

Chapter

Command Codes

Justification, Vertical
Purpose

Specifies a lower vertical print position relative to the print
position of the alphanumerics command. This feature is useful for
positioning data within boxes or columns on a form.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) J jus (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Vertical Justification command. Enter J.

jus

Normal Resolution:
Defines the new vertical justification (position) for
character printing in tenth inches and dot rows.
Enter a three-digit value ranging from 000 through
999 to define the new print location down from the
starting position of the command sequence. The
first two digits specify 0.1 through 9.9 inches
downward justification; the third digit specifies an
additional 0 through 9 dot rows of downward
justification. The decimal point between the first two
digits is automatically understood by VGL and the
third digit is automatically interpreted as dot rows.
High Resolution:
Defines vertical justification (position) for character
printing in thousandth inches. Enter a five-digit
value ranging from 00000 through 99999 to define
the printing location down from the starting position
of the command sequence from 0.0 inch through
99.999 inches. VGL automatically understands the
decimal point between the second and third digits
as thousandths.
If the data character immediately following the jus
field is not a digit (zero through nine), then you can
omit trailing zeros. For example, the command
^M10010000000^J01ABC, results in a 1.000 inch
justification because the three empty spaces in the
jus field (before the characters "ABC") are
completed with three implied trailing zero digits.

NOTE: If your data to be printed begin with a number (not a character), then
you must complete the field; otherwise, VGL assumes the number is
a digit in the field value.
The data to print at the new print position is input
following the Character Justification Change
command.
(cc)-

108

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Justification, Vertical

NOTE: This command causes extra vertical blank spaces at the bottom of a
form if its value is greater than the bottom edge of any previously
drawn graphical element in the current command sequence.
Comments
The J command is input as part of the data in one of the
alphanumeric commands and only affects the justification; other
parameters (such as height and width) are not changed.
A justification of 2 inches specifies a print position 2 inches down
from the position of the alphanumerics command; a subsequent
justification of 1 specifies the print position at 1 inch down from
the position of the alphanumerics command.
Example

The following sample commands illustrate character justification
changes in normal resolution. (The Graphics Mode Enable
command was previously sent to enable Graphics Mode but is
not shown in the examples.)

^M05,05,000Aa^J105Bb^M10,05,050Cc^J100Dd^-

^V05,05,000I^J050G^J025P^-

vertj

^E05,05,000IGP^J050IGP^J100IGP^-

109

Chapter

Command Codes

^U03,05,000DOWN^J100SIDE^J050UP^-

Line Feed
Purpose

Performs a line feed (hex 0A) and a carriage return function when
used to terminate a standard graphics command.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc)*
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The graphics LF mnemonic. Enter *.

Comments
The line feed command functions as a carriage return only when
it is used to terminate a graphics sequence in an extended
graphics command when Free Format is enabled.

110

Line Slew

Line Slew
Purpose

Changes the vertical print position by specifying a number of lines
to advance the paper from the current print position.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) slew n (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

slew

Represents a Line Slew command. Enter K or W.
(Both K and W perform the same line slew
command.)

Specifies the number of lines to advance (slew) at
the current lines per inch (lpi) setting. Enter a twodigit number of lines ranging from 01 through 99.
For example, enter 05 to slew 5 lines, 21 to slew 21
lines.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Line Spacing
Purpose

Selects a new line spacing in lines per inch (lpi).

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ L newlpi (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Line Spacing command. Enter L to
change the line spacing.

newlpi

Represents the line spacing parameter. Enter one
of the two-digit codes shown in Table 13 to select a
new line spacing. For example, enter 10 to select
10 lpi.
Not all values are available on all printer models.
Check with your printer User's Manual for the line
spacing options available.
Once the new line spacing is selected, all lines are
printed at the new lpi setting until another line
spacing is selected or VGL returns to the Normal
Mode.

111

Chapter

Command Codes

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Table 13. Line Spacing Codes
Line Spacing Code

Line Spacing (lpi) Selected

Values above 20 (except 72) default to 18. Values
selected but not shown on the table are rounded to
the nearest value. For example, selecting a line
spacing code of 05, would be rounded up to 06.
Example

The following example illustrates different line spacings.

^PY^-^F^Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode^*
at the standard line spacing^*
of 6 lines per inch.^*
^@L08^-Standard characters in the Graphics Mode^*
at the new line spacing^*
of 8 lines per inch.^*
^@L06^^O^-^PN^-

112

Lines, Dashed

Lines, Dashed
Purpose

Produces dashed lines.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) LD horz vert (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Dashed Line command. Enter LD.

horz

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of the line in tenth
inches and dot columns. Enter a three-digit
horizontal length value ranging from 000 through
999 to define a horizontal length of 00.0 through
99.9 inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0
through 9 to specify 0 through 9 additional dot
columns of length. VGL automatically understands
the decimal between the second and third digits for
tenth inches and automatically interprets the fourth
digit as dot columns. The additional dots are only
printed if the length is an even number. If the length
is an odd number, the space for the additional dots
is provided but the dots are not printed. For
example, entering 0126 specifies a 1.2-inch plus 6dot column horizontal line length; entering 1016
specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column horizontal
line length, but the additional 6 dots are not printed.
The LD command is ignored if either length
parameter is zero plus zero dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of a line in thousandth
inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal value ranging
from 00000 through 99999 to define a horizontal
length of 0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.

vert

113

Chapter

Command Codes

If the length is an odd number, the space for the
additional dots is provided but the dots are not
printed. For example, entering 0004 specifies a 0.0inch plus 4-dot row vertical line length; entering
0242 specifies a 2.4-inch plus 2-dot row vertical line
length, but the additional 2 dots are not printed. The
LD command is ignored if either length parameter
is zero plus zero dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of a line in thousandth
inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from
00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of
0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.
NOTE: Even in High Resolution Mode, dashed lines are still "dashed" in
tenths-of-an-inch increments.
(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
Line drawing commands are positioned by the parameters or
commands of an alphanumerics command sequence (such as
horizontal tabs, the justification parameter, etc.). Consequently,
an alphanumeric command must precede a line drawing
command.
Using appropriate values for the horizontal and vertical line length
parameters constructs a variety of vertical and horizontal lines in
varying line thicknesses. The dashed line is produced by printing
the odd tenth inches of length only; the even tenth inches of
length are blanked. If the length ends in an even number (2.4" for
example), the last even tenth inch is blank, making the line
appear one-tenth inch too short. A 2.4" dashed line appears to be
the same length as a 2.3" dashed line due to the blanking of the
last even tenth inch.
The vertical or horizontal orientation of the dashed line is
determined by the horizontal and vertical length parameters. If
the horizontal length parameter is the longest, a dashed
horizontal line is printed; conversely, if the vertical length
parameter is the longest, a dashed vertical line is printed. If the
horizontal and vertical line length parameters are equal, VGL
prints a horizontal dashed line.

114

Lines, Dashed

Examples The following examples illustrate dashed lines in normal
resolution mode. Note that changing the horizontal and vertical
line length parameter values constructs a variety of dashed
vertical and horizontal lines in varying line thicknesses. With
horizontal lines, the horizontal length parameter actually specifies
line length and the vertical length parameter determines line
thickness. Similarly with vertical lines, the vertical length
parameter specifies line length and the horizontal length
parameter determines line thickness. Notice that an
alphanumerics command is required for line positioning.
^PY^^M01,01,000^LD0200,0010^LD0200,0001^^PN^-

^PY^^M01,01,000^LD0150,0150^^PN^-

lines.ex

115

Chapter

Command Codes

^PY^^M01,01,000^LD0150,0154^^PN^-

lines.ex3

Lines, Solid
Purpose

Produces solid lines.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) LS horz vert (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Solid Line command. Enter LS.

horz

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal line length in tenth inches
and dot columns. Enter a three-digit horizontal
length value ranging from 000 through 999 to
define a horizontal length of 00.0 through 99.9
inches and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to
specify 0 through 9 additional dot columns of
length.
VGL automatically understands the decimal
between the second and third digits for tenth inches
and automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot
columns.
For example, entering 0120 specifies a 1.2-inch
plus no-dot column horizontal line length; entering
1016 specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column
horizontal line length. This command is ignored if
either length parameter is zero plus zero dots.

116

Lines, Solid

High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal length of a line in thousandth
inches. Enter a five-digit horizontal value ranging
from 00000 through 99999 to define a horizontal
length of 0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.
vert

Normal Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of the line in tenth inches
and dot rows. Enter a three-digit vertical length
value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a
vertical length of 00.0 through 99.9 inches and a
fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to specify 0
through 9 additional dot rows of length.
VGL automatically understands the decimal
between the second and third digits for tenth inches
and automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot
rows.
For example, entering 0004 specifies a 0.0-inch
plus 4-dot row vertical line length; entering 0240
specifies a 2.4-inch plus no-dot row vertical line
length. This command is ignored if either length
parameter is zero plus zero dots.
High Resolution:
Defines the vertical length of a line in thousandth
inches. Enter a five-digit vertical value ranging from
00000 through 99999 to define a vertical length of
0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

117

Chapter

Command Codes

Example

The following commands illustrate solid lines in normal resolution.
As shown in the examples, changing the horizontal and vertical
line length parameter values constructs a variety of vertical and
horizontal lines in varying line thicknesses.
With horizontal lines, the horizontal length parameter actually
specifies line length and the vertical length parameter determines
line thickness.
Similarly with vertical lines, the vertical length parameter specifies
line length and the horizontal length parameter determines line
thickness. (The Graphics Mode Enable command was previously
sent to enable Graphics Mode but is not shown in the examples.
Additionally, an alphanumerics command must be sent for line
positioning but is not shown in the examples.)

^LS0425,0010^-

^LS0100,0100^-

^LS0001,0150^-

Logo Generation (Version II)

118

Purpose

Provides eight pre-designed logos and symbols in different sizes
and rotations totaling 14 new options. Logo Generation is used in
conjunction with the Pixel Expansion command described on
page 125

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) ILOGO, value (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

ILOGO,

The Logo Generation command. Enter ILOGO, (the
comma following the command is required).

value

Represents the variable which selects the predefined logo or symbol. Enter a 2-digit value from
Table 14 representing the symbol or logo desired.

(cc)G

The required terminator for the ILOGO, command.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration followed by a G to end the ILOGO, command
sequence.

Logo Generation (Version II)

Table 14. Logo Generation Values
Value

Description

Registered trademark symbol

Registered trademark symbol at 90 degrees

UL symbol, large

UL symbol, large, at 90 degrees

Trademark symbol

Trademark symbol at 90 degrees

CSA symbol

CSA symbol at 90 degrees

UL symbol, medium

UL symbol, small

TUV Rheinland symbol

GS-Mark symbol

Comments
The Pixel Expansion (IPEXP) command, described on page 125,
may be used with all logos printed using the ILOGO, command.
Logos and symbols created using the Z command (described on
page 150) are still available and do not conflict with the ILOGO,
command. Do not use any alphanumeric-rotation commands with
ILOGO, symbols and logos.
Example

The following program and print sample illustrate how the
copyright symbol (value 41 from Table 14) is called using the
ILOGO, command. Note that the alphanumerics command ^M is
simply “introducing” an Extended Graphics command; therefore,
the alphanumeric command parameters (01,01,000) are optional.

^PY^^M^IPEXP,06,06^G^ILOGO,41^G^^PN^-

ilogo.ex

119

Chapter

Command Codes

Logo, PCX
Purpose

Downloads and prints PCX format logos.

Mode

Standard Graphics format except for option E (see below).

Format
Format 1

(cc) IPCX, option name [,size] [,DISK] (cc)G
PCX logo data
(cc) IPCX, END(cc)G

Format 2

(cc) IPCX, option name [,DISK] (cc)G

Format 3

(cc) IPCX, option (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IPCX,

The Logo Generation command. Enter IPCX, (the
comma following the command is required).

option

C = Creates/Loads logo into printer memory.
The logo can be printed later.
E = Executes/Prints logo.
D = Deletes logo from printer memory.
R = Resets/Clears logo from printer memory.
L = Lists all the PCX logos that are stored in
printer memory.

name

Name of logo. Required for options C, E, and D.

size

Size (in bytes) of the logo.

DISK

Optional parameter to download a logo to flash
memory or execute (print) a logo stored in flash
memory. Enter DISK. Currently, the DISK
parameter only applies to option C and option E.

(cc)G

The required terminator for the IPCX, command.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
followed by a G to end the IPCX, command
sequence.

PCX logo data
Logo data in PCX format. Must be in either
uncompressed or packbits format.
END

Ends PCX logo to be downloaded.

NOTE: Format 1 is used for creating/downloading a logo (option C).
Format 2 is used for executing (printing) a logo (option E), or deleting
a logo from memory (option D).
Format 3 is used for listing (option L) or clearing (option R) all logos
from memory.
NOTE: Option E (executing/printing a logo) should be used in Graphics mode
with Extended Graphics Command selected. All other options should
be used in Standard Graphics mode.

120

Logo, TIFF

Example

To download a PCX logo:

^IPCX,Cfilename[,size]^G
PCX logo data
^IPCX,END^G
Your host may interpret the PCX data as control codes, which
affects the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult your
host's user manual for sending binary data.
To print a PCX logo in Extended Graphics mode:
^IPCX,Efilename^G

Logo, TIFF
Purpose

Downloads and prints TIFF format logos.

Mode

Standard Graphics format except for option E (see below).

Format
Format 1

(cc) ITIFF, option name [,size] [,DISK] (cc)G
TIFF logo data
(cc) ITIFF, END(cc)G

Format 2

(cc) ITIFF, option name [,DISK] (cc)G

Format 3

(cc) ITIFF, option (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

ITIFF,

The Logo Generation command. Enter ITIFF, (the
comma following the command is required).

option

name

Name of logo. Required for options C, E, and D.

size

Size (in bytes) of the logo.

DISK

Optional parameter to download a logo to flash
memory or execute (print) a logo stored in flash
memory. Enter DISK. Currently, the DISK
parameter only applies to option C and option E.

(cc)G

The required terminator for the ITIFF, command.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
followed by a G to end the ITIFF, command
sequence.

TIFF logo data
Logo data in TIFF format. Must be in either
uncompressed or packbits format.

121

Chapter

Command Codes

END

Ends Tiff logo to be downloaded.

To download a TIFF logo:

^ITIFF,Cfilename[,size]^G
TIFF logo data
^ITIFF,END^G
Your host may interpret the TIFF data as control codes, which
affects the way the host sends data to the printer. Consult your
host's user manual for sending binary data.
To print a TIFF logo in Extended Graphics mode:
^ITIFF,Efilename^G

Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II)
NOTE: This command is partially supported on L7032 printers. The L7032
printer supports only EJECT, COPY, ORIENTATION, and MARGINS.
Purpose

Controls the paper options for printing.

NOTE: Not all options may be available with your printer. Consult your printer
User's Manual to determine which options are available. If an option
is not available, the emulation ignores the corresponding command.
Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) IPAGE, option [,value] (cc)G (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IPAGE,

The command to control paper options. Enter
IPAGE, (the comma following the command is
required).

option [,value] Represents the option to be set. See Table 15.
Enter the option and comma, then the value.

122

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Page, Controlling Paper Options (Version II)

Table 15. Page, Controlling Paper Options
Option

Value and Meaning

SPEED,
(Thermal only)

Specifies the print speed in lines per minute at 6 lpi. Enter SPEED and a number in
the range of 0 through 9999.

INTENSITY,
(Thermal only)

Specifies the darkness of the dots. Enter INTENSITY and a number in the range of
-15 through +15.

TEAR,
(Thermal only)

Sets the printer to pause (for the user to tear-off a page) after a specified number of
pages. Enter TEAR and a number in the range of 0 through 256 (0 implies no pause).

CUT,

Sets the printer to cut a page after a specified number of pages. Enter CUT and a
number in the range of 0 through 256 (0 implies no cutting). Note: This does not
perform a job separation. Use the EJECT command for job separations.

LABELS,
(Thermal)

Specifies the label sensor. Enter LABELS and a number in the range from 0 through
7 (0 is disable).
0 = No sensor
1 = Reflective gap sensor,
2 = Transmissive gap sensor.

EJECT,

Tells the printer to eject a partially-complete page from the printer, regardless of the
current graphical print position. Enter EJECT. (No values follow the command.) On
continuous form printers, EJECT moves enough paper so that all completed or
partially completed pages are fused and moved completely out of the engine.

COPY,

Sets the printer to print multiple copies of each "physical page" - that is, one cut sheet
or the distance between perforations on continuous forms, which may contain
multiple forms or labels. (If the page contains incremented fields for a repeated form,
the image is the same.) Enter COPY followed by the number of copies from 001
through 999. (If a partial page has not been printed and an EJECT is performed, then
the selected number of copies of the partial page is produced.)

ORIENTATION,

Sets printing orientation. After the IPAGE command, enter either PORT for portrait,
LAND or RLAND for landscape, INV for inverted portrait, or LLAND for inverted
landscape. If any data has been drawn on a page when this command is received
with a new orientation, the current physical page is printed and the next page is in the
new orientation. (Existing margin settings apply to the new orientation.)

MARGINS,

Sets the page margins and printable text length. Enter MARGIN followed by four
digits specifying the top margin in hundredths of an inch (0000/0.00 - 9999/99.99),
three digits specifying the text length in character lines at the current line spacing
(001-999), and four digits specifying the left margin in hundredths of an inch (0000/
0.00 - 9999/99.99). (See Appendix D for an explanation of page margins.)

123

Chapter

Command Codes

Passing Hex Values
Purpose

Sends specified hex values to the printer. This command can be
used in Standard or Extended Graphics mode.

Mode

Standard or Extended Graphics mode, with or without an
Extended Graphic Command selected

Format

(cc) IHEX, value
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

IHEX,

The Pass Hex Values command. Enter IHEX,. (The
comma following the command is required).

value

The hex value to be sent to the printer. Valid values
are hex 00 through FF.

Comments
The IHEX command can be used to send graphic and nongraphic hex data. The difference between the use of the
command is shown in example 1, Standard Graphic mode, and
Example 2, Extended Graphic mode.
Example 1
The following example of the command used in the Standard
Graphic mode, prints A through F with C underlined. The hex 08
is the control code for a backspace.
NOTE: The "Control Code 08" setting for the Line Printer Plus Emulation
must be set to "Backspace" in order for VGL to recognize the hex
code. Refer to your User's Manual for details.
^PY^ABC^IHEX,08_DEF
^PN^-

124

Pixel Expansion (Version II)

Example 2 The following example of the command used in the Extended
Graphic mode, prints Schön with the proper accent marks.
^PY^-^F^
^M0202000Sch^IHEX,F6n^^O^-^PN^-

Pixel Expansion (Version II)
Purpose

Expands those graphics which were plotted using the ILOGO,
command (page 118), the Plotting Graphics (cc)Q command
(page 129), and the Symbols command (page 145).

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphic Command selected

Format

cc) IPEXP, horz, vert (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

IPEXP,

The Pixel Expansion command. Enter IPEXP, (the
comma following the command is required).

horz

The horizontal expansion of the logo or symbol.
Enter a value ranging from 1 through 255. Leading
zeros for values less than three digits are not
required.

vert

The vertical expansion of the logo or symbol. Enter
a value ranging from 1 through 255. Leading zeros
for values less than three digits are not required.

(cc)G

The required terminator for the IPEXP, command.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration followed by a G to end the IPEXP, command
sequence.

Comments
Only use the IPEXP, command in conjunction with graphics
plotting and symbols which were created using the ILOGO,
command, the Plotting Graphics Q command, and the Symbols
command. The IPEXP, command expands these pre-designed
graphics and symbols similar to the way normal characters are
expanded using the Character Height and Character Width
commands.
The IPEXP, command does not affect any other elements, such
as fonts. Unless this command is turned off, once an expansion
factor is selected, that value remains selected until a new IPEXP,
command is received. Turn this command off by entering 1,1 for
the horizontal and vertical expansion values.

125

Chapter

Command Codes

Example

The following program and print sample illustrate how the TUV
Rheinland symbol (value 61 from Table 14) is called using the
ILOGO, command and expanded 4X by 4X using the IPEXP,
command. Note that the alphanumerics command ^M is simply
“introducing” an Extended Graphics command; therefore, the
alphanumeric command parameters (such as 01,01,000) are
optional.

^PY^-^F^^M^IPEXP,04,04^G^ILOGO,61^G^^PN^-

126

Plotting Bitmap Images

Plotting Bitmap Images
Purpose

Creates and prints bitmap images

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

To create a bitmap image:
(cc) IPLOT, type, id, width, data (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

IPLOT,

The bitmap image command. Enter IPLOT, (the
comma is required).

type

The data type that is used to specify the bitmap.
Enter 4 for 4 bit data, or 8 for 8 bit data. For 4 bit
data, two bytes determine 8 bits of the image. For 8
bit data, one byte determines 8 bits of the image.

The bitmap identification number. Enter a one digit
number between 0 and 9.

width

The width of the bitmap, in bytes. Enter a value
between 1 and 999. Leading zeros for values with
less than 3 digits are not required.

data

The bitmap image data. The data may either be
specified in its entirety, or represented in a compressed format using the (cc)B, (cc)W, and (cc)D
commands in any sequence and quantity.

(cc)B pattern, count
Byte repeat specifier. Allows you to repeat a
desired byte pattern. Enter the SFCC, followed by
B. Then enter a 2 character byte pattern, followed
by a comma, followed by a value between 1 and
999 for the number of times (count) to repeat the
pattern. Leading zeros for values with less than 3
digits are not required.
(cc)W count "White" byte (all bits "off") repetition. Enter the
SFCC, followed by W, followed by a value between
1 and 999 for the number of times (count) to repeat
the pattern. Leading zeros for values with less than
3 digits are not required.
(cc)D count

"Dark" byte (all bits "on") repetition. Enter the
SFCC, followed by D followed by a value between
1 and 999 for the number of times (count) to repeat
the pattern. Leading zeros for values with less than
3 digits are not required.

(cc)G

IPLOT command terminator. Enter the SFCC for
your VGL configuration followed by G to end the
IPLOT command sequence.

127

Chapter

Command Codes

To print a previously created bitmap image:
(cc) IPLOT,E, id (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IPLOT,E,

The bitmap image execute (print) command. Enter
IPLOT,E, (both commas are required).

The bitmap identification number. Enter a one digit
number between 0 and 9. The number must
correspond to the identification number used for a
previously created bitmap, or an error is reported.

(cc)G

IPLOT command terminator. Enter the SFCC for
your VGL configuration followed by G to end the
IPLOT command sequence.

Comments
Bitmap images are stored in memory only as long as the printer
power is applied, or until being replaced by another bitmap with
the same identification number. The maximum size and number
of bitmaps that may be created is dependent on the amount of
available printer memory. Therefore, it may not be possible to
store up to the maximum number of 10 bitmap images if each is
relatively large.
Bitmap images may be created using the IPLOT, command as a
standard graphics command once graphics mode has been
enabled. However, the IPLOT,E, command must be used as an
extended graphics command within a graphics (^M, ^V, ^E, ^U,
^T, ^J) command sequence to position and rotate the bitmap as
desired.
Example

The bit pattern 11000011 is represented by the hex characters
C3. To specify 10 consecutive C3 patterns, you can enter either
C3C3C3C3C3C3C3C3C3C3 or, using the byte repeat format,
(cc)BC3,10. Also, for clarity, commas may be embedded within
the data stream, such as C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3,C3 or
C3C3,C3C3,C3C3,C3C3,C3C3.
A stream of 6 consecutive 00 bytes may be written
00,00,00,00,00,00 or, using the "white" byte repetition format,
(cc)W6.
A stream of 9 consecutive FF bytes may be written
FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFF or, using the "dark" byte repetition
format, (cc)D9.
The following illustrates how to create and print a simple bitmap
image. The bitmap is created using 4 bit data, is identified as
bitmap number 0, and is 120 bytes wide. On a 300 dpi printer,
this creates an image that is 3 inches wide (120 bytes*8 bits per
byte = 900 bits, or 900 dots, or 3 inches wide).

128

Plotting Graphics (Columns)

^PY^^F^^IPLOT,4,0,120,
^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,
^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,
^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,
^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,
^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,
^D40,^W40,^D40,^D40,^W40,^D40,
^G^^O^^PN^The following prints the bitmap:
^PY^^M0101000^IPLOT,E,0^G^^,
^PN^The resulting image:

Plotting Graphics (Columns)
Purpose

Creates logos or other graphic patterns by plotting in dotaddressable columns.

NOTE: Do not confuse this graphics plot command, (cc)Q, with the odd dot
plot command, (cc)Q, discussed on page 132. The graphics plot
command discussed in this section plots in vertical data bytes
(columns) and is effective when an Extended Graphics Command is
selected. Odd dot plot plots in horizontal data bytes (rows) and is
effective when a Standard Graphics Command is selected.
Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) Q data (cc) G (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Logo command. Enter Q.

data

The hexadecimal logo data. Each hexadecimal
value defines one 7-dot vertical data byte (column)
for each 0.1-inch row.

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, to end the input of logo data.

129

Chapter

Command Codes

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately
followed by - to end the command sequence.

Comments
Logos are positioned by the parameters or commands of an
alphanumerics command sequence (such as horizontal tabs, the
justification parameter, etc.) and can be created only from within
an alphanumerics command sequence. Consequently, an
alphanumerics command must precede a Logo command.
Any logo that can be designed using the rows of the 0.1-inch x
0.1-inch matrix grid can be produced with the Q command. The
form example in the “Exercises And Examples” chapter on page
301, illustrates how the hand logo was produced. An arrow
pattern is illustrated in the following example.
Graphics designed using this command cannot be stored in VGL
memory for future use. Once your graphic pattern prints, it is
automatically purged from VGL working memory.
Example 1
The bottom-most bit of the data byte corresponds to the least
significant bit (LSB) of the data byte, which corresponds to the
bottom row (row #1); the data byte works up through the other
bits to the top-most significant bit of the data byte, which
corresponds to the top bit row (row #7).
Summing the values determines the data for each column of the
logo. Table 16 shows the decimal value sums for each data byte
(column) for the arrow pattern illustrated. Each byte was
calculated first in decimal and then converted to the equivalent
hexadecimal value (using the ASCII chart in Appendix A). These
hexadecimal values are then entered in the data parameter for
the Q command.

130

Plotting Graphics (Columns)

Table 16. Graphics Logo Plot Data Format

Bit#

Decimal
Value

Top 7

Bottom 1

Data Bytes (Columns)
2 3 4 5 6

1 LSB

Decimal Value: 12 12 12 45 30 12
Hex Value:

0C 0C 0C 2D 1E 0C

Example 2 The sample command below illustrates the logo function drawing
the arrow shown in Table 16. The six hex data values for each
0.1" x 0.1" matrix are repeated and horizontal tabs and
justification commands are used to produce the arrow in an arrow
pattern. Notice that an alphanumerics command was required for
logo positioning.
^PY^-^F^^M01,01,000^T0070^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^^M01,01,000^T0090^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^^M01,01,000^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,
1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,
0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,
1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^^M01,01,000^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,
1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,
0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,
1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^^M01,01,000^T0090^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^^M01,01,000^T0070^Q0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C,0C,0C,0C,2D,1E,0C^G^^O^-^PN^-

logoarro.

131

Chapter

Command Codes

Plotting Graphics (Rows)
NOTE: The Plotting Graphics command is not supported on L7032 printers.
Purpose

Allows you to address and print any individual dot position using
Printronix odd and even dot plot commands. Odd and even dot
plot addresses each dot position using a row method (as
opposed to the column method created in Extended Graphics as
described on page 129.)

NOTE: Do not confuse this odd dot plot command, (cc)Q, with the graphics
plot command, (cc)Q, discussed on page 129. The odd dot plot
discussed in this section plots in horizontal data bytes (rows) and is
effective when a Standard Graphics Command is selected. Graphics
plot plots in vertical data bytes (columns) and is effective when an
Extended Graphics Command is selected.
Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) plot data (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

plot

Represents a Printronix plot command. Enter Q for
normal density odd dot plot, or enter C for high density even dot plot.

data

The plot data. Enter the hex data required to produce the desired graphics pattern. (See Comments
below.)

(cc)G

Following the data, enter the (SFCC) for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by any valid
command character or G, the universal sequence
terminator.

Comments
Graphics designed using this command cannot be stored in VGL
memory for future use. Once your graphic pattern prints, it is
automatically purged from VGL working memory.
In typical Printronix plotting, the binary pattern ASCII characters
supplied as data are used to address the character columns with
the Least Significant Bit (LSB) corresponding to the left-most dot
column. VGL, however, addresses the binary pattern of hex data
bytes in a "mirror image" of Printronix plotting, with the LSB
addressing the right-most dot position.
Two plot types are available and defined below: odd dot plot for
normal density and even dot plot for high density applications.
You must define each byte of each data line in plot format, which
is explained in the "Plot Data Byte Format" section on the next
page.
Odd dot plot (normal density plotting) is selected with the Odd
Dot Plot command, (cc)Q data (cc)G. Odd dot plot addresses the

132

Plotting Graphics (Rows)

odd numbered dot columns to produce a horizontal and vertical
density that varies based on the printer and mode of operation.
Even dot plot (high density plotting) is selected with the Even
Dot Plot command, (cc)C data (cc)G. Even dot plot works in
conjunction with the Odd Dot Plot command. The odd and even
numbered dot columns are addressed to double the horizontal
density.

Plot Data Format
You must define each byte for a complete line of data in plot format. Plot Data
Byte Format explains how to define each byte along a data line. Plot Data
Line Format explains how to take each defined byte and create a complete
line of data.

Plot Data Byte Format
Each data byte specifies six of the twelve dot columns that compose one
character column. Using odd dot plot, bits 1 through 6 of the data byte
address the odd numbered dot columns; using even dot plot, bits 1 through 6
of the data byte address the even numbered dot columns.
Byte #

Data
11 0 0 0 1 0 0
Dot Pattern

2
1 11 1 1 1 1 1

...

132

1110 000 1

A dot is printed for each bit that is set ("1") in the data byte. When using plot
commands, bits 7 and 8 of the data byte must always be set "1". The sum of
each bit in the data byte, in hexadecimal value, becomes the plot data used in
the plot command.
For example, refer to Table 17. A hex data value of C4 prints a dot at the
column corresponding to the 04 bit. A hex data byte value of FF produces
dots in all columns; a value of C0 leaves the column blank. The bit pattern
addresses the odd columns of the character space for odd dot plot or the
even columns of the character space for even dot plot. Both odd and even
columns are used for high density plot. These hex data bytes to produce the
graphics pattern are entered in the data parameter of the plot command.
Table 17 illustrates the plotting hex data required to produce the same arrow
graphics as shown in Table 16 on page 131 for the Logo Mode.

133

Chapter

Command Codes

Table 17. Odd Dot Plot Data Example

Byte/Character Column #1
Odd Dot Columns:

1
Binary
Pattern

Decimal
Value for
the Row

11000100

196

11000010

194

11111111

255

11111111

255

11000010

194

11000100

196

Bit #:
Decimal Value:

Dot Row

128

16 08 04 02

Hex Data
Byte for
the Row

Bit 7 and 8 may be “0” or “1” in Plot Mode.
LSB

Plot Data Line Format
Each plotted line of data may include up to 132 data bytes. The first data byte
in the line addresses the dot positions to print in the first character column; the
second data byte addresses the dot positions to print in the second character
column, etc. After the last byte of data, enter the terminator command (cc)G,
and repeat this sequence for the number of plot lines involved.
In odd dot plot, the (cc)G terminator causes the contents of the buffer to plot
and advances the paper (or moves the logical print position in thermal
printers) a single dot row based on the vertical density of the current print
mode. In even dot plot, the paper/logical print position is not advanced.
For high density plot, the Even Dot Plot and Odd Dot Plot commands are
used in conjunction with two data lines. The Even Dot command is sent with
the first data line along with the (cc)G terminator. The terminator causes the
contents of the buffer to plot in the even dot columns but does not advance
the paper/logical print position. The printer waits for the second line of data
using the Odd Dot Plot command and a terminator. Data in the buffer is
plotted in odd dot columns of the same row where even dot column data was
just plotted and the paper/logical print position is advanced one dot row at the
vertical density of the current print mode.

134

Reset

Example

The following sample command illustrates Printronix plotting,
plotting a line of arrows using the data shown in Table 17.

^PY^-^F^^QC4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4^*
^QC2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2^*
^QFF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF^*
^QFF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF,FF^*
^QC2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2,C2^*
^QC4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4,C4^*
^O^-^PN^-

plot.

Reset
NOTE: The Reset command is not supported on L7032 printers.
Purpose

Resets VGL to the current user defined configuration.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ R (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Reset command. Enter R to reset the
printer to the current user defined configuration.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The Reset command prints any pending page then resets VGL to
the current user defined configuration (last loaded configuration
plus any front panel changes). This may not be the same
configuration used to power-up the printer if the front panel
changes were made and not saved to flash memory. VGL then
restarts as if just powered up (no dynamic forms in form library,
character substitution sets reset, starts printing in upper left
corner, etc.).
NOTE: Any EVFU setting in the Line Printer Plus Emulation (by direct codes
or the VGL (cc)L command) is not reset (see page 89).

135

Chapter

Command Codes

Reverse Print
Purpose

Produces white characters on either a black printed background
or any of the shaded or patterned backgrounds available with the
shading and shading mask features.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) R data (cc)R (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Reverse Print command. Enter R.

data

The data characters for reverse printing.

(cc)R

Following the data, enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration and the Reverse Print command (R)
to turn off the reverse printing feature.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your configuration immediately
followed by - to end the command sequence.

Comments
The R command is input as part of the data in one of the
alphanumeric commands. The R command must be turned on
and off by command. Any character data entered between the
reverse print on and off commands is printed in reverse print.
However, when the alphanumerics command sequence is
terminated, reverse printing is also terminated.
Shading (page 140) or shading mask (page 142) backgrounds
are also available with the R command. Do not use Compressed
Print Fonts (discussed on page 47) with this feature.
The reverse printed character is actually created by not printing
within the black or shaded background. A dark box border is
automatically produced around the reverse printed characters
character. The black background border combined with the size
of the character increases the total area of the character field. If
the descending character printing feature is used with reverse
print, the black background border area is increased to allow for
the descending character space.

136

Reverse Print

Example

The following examples illustrate reverse printing command
sequences. In the first example, notice that the alphanumerics
command sequence terminator was also used to end reverse
printing.

^PY^^M05,05,000IGP^RIGP^^PN^-

reve

^PY^^U05,05,000DOWN^RSIDE^RUP^^PN^-

137

Chapter

IMPACT

Command Codes

Scaling
Purpose

Selects a new line spacing and different horizontal by vertical (H
x V) dot density from the standard 120 x 72 base density. (See
Comments below.)

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ M scale 00 (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the SFCC for your configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Scaling command. Enter M to change
the horizontal and vertical scaling.

scale

Represents the scaling parameter. Enter one of the
two-digit codes shown in Table 18 to select a new
scaling. For example, with an MVP printer, enter 02
to select mode 2, 120 x 72 (H x V) dpi scale.
Once the new scaling is selected, all printing
reflects the new scale in horizontal by vertical dots
per inch (dpi) until scaling is disabled or VGL
returns to the Normal Mode.

Toggles scaling on and off. When 00 is first
entered, the scaling value as selected in the scale
parameter is enabled if a printer is selected through
the “Prt to Emulate” option. When 00 is entered
again, scaling is disabled and VGL returns to the
default scaling configuration.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your
configuration followed by - to end the command
sequence.

NOTE: If the VGL Options “Prt to Emulate” is selected, scaling is enabled.
Comments Dot density varies by printer mode; selecting a different printer
mode selects a different horizontal and vertical dot density. This
varying density can affect graphic elements created in one
particular mode but printed in a different mode. Scaling permits
graphic elements, such as corners or boxes, to retain their
physical shapes and sizes when printed in a horizontal and
vertical density other than the base density of 120 x 72 dpi.

138

Scaling

Table 18. Scaling Codes
Printer Type
MVP and MVP 150B

L150

P3040

P6000

P9000

Scale
Code

Printer Mode

Dot Density
(H x V) dpi

00
01
02
03
04
05

Toggles Scaling On/Off
1
2
3
4
5

200 x 96
120 x 72
125 x 64
100 x 48
200 x 72

00
01
02
03
04
05

Toggles Scaling On/Off
1
2
3
4
5

200 x 96
120 x 72
125 x 64
145 x 72
160 x 72

00
01
02
03
04
05

Toggles Scaling On/Off
1
2
3
4
5

180 x 96
120 x 72
120 x 48
145 x 72
160 x 72

00
01
02
03

Toggles Scaling On/Off
1
2
3

120 x 144
120 x 72
120 x 48

00
01
02
03

Toggles Scaling On/Off
1
2
3

180 x 96
120 x 72
120 x 48

NOTE: MVP and MVP 150B printers must be in Scale Mode 02 and Printer
Mode 2 to produce readable barcodes. L150 printers must be in
Scale Mode 04 and Printer Mode 4 to produce readable barcodes,
except for UPC-A, EAN 8 and EAN 13, which require Mode 5 to
produce readable barcodes.

139

Chapter

Command Codes

Shading
Purpose

Produces alphanumeric characters using a black-shaded
impression.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) KH data (cc)KH (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

The Shading command. Enter KH to turn on the
shading feature.

data

The data characters to print in shaded graphics.

(cc)KH

Following the data, enter the Special Function Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration and
KH to turn off the shading feature.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The KH feature must be turned on and off by command. Any
character data entered between the KH on and off commands is
shaded when printed. Shading commands are input as part of the
data in one of the alphanumeric commands. Reverse printing
(discussed on page 136) can be combined with shading.
When the shading feature is used, only certain dot positions are
printed (versus every dot position in the normal graphics) which
produces the shaded images. The shading value can be changed
using the Shading Mask command discussed on page 142.
Examples The following sample commands illustrate shading.
^PY^^M05,05,000AaBb^KHCcDd^KH^^PN^-

140

Shading

^PY^^M05,03,000IGP SH^KHAD^KHING^^PN^-

^PY^^E05,05,000IGP^KHIGP^KH^^PN^-

shad

^PY^^E05,05,000I^KHG^KHP^^PN^-

shad

^PY^^U03,03,000SHADING^KHDOWN^KHUPSIDE^^PN^-

141

Chapter

Command Codes

Shading Mask
Purpose

Activates the shading feature with a specific shading mask.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) KL mask data (cc)KH (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

The Shading Mask command. Enter KL to turn on
the shading mask feature.

mask

Represents the shading mask factor. Enter a twodigit hex value ranging from 00 through FF to specify the shading mask factor. Four default shading
mask patterns are available and shown below. See
Appendix B for print samples of all masking values.

Mask Value
(Hex)
00
01
04
FF

Default Shading
Mask Produced
|||||||
///////
\\\\\

The shading mask selected remains selected until
another mask value is selected or the Shading
Mask command is turned off.

142

data

The data characters to print in mask shaded
graphics.

(cc)KH

Following the data, enter the Special Function
Control Code (SFCC) for your VGL configuration
and KH to turn off the shading mask feature.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Shading Mask

Comments
The KL command is used as part of the data contained in one of
the alphanumeric commands.
Shading Mask commands must be turned on and off by
command. Any character data entered between the KL on and off
commands is shaded with the selected mask. Shading must be
turned off before any commands are used to change character
height, width, justification, or horizontal print position. Reverse
printing can be combined with shading.
Examples The following sample commands illustrate shading. Four default
mask shading factors are available to produce vertical stripes
(KL00), horizontal stripes (KLFF), slanted stripes upper right to
lower left (KL01), and slanted stripes upper left to lower right
(KL04).
^PY^^M03,03,000IGP^KL00IGP^KLFFIGP^KL01IGP^KL04IGP^^PN^-

^PY^^M03,03,000IGP^KL00MASK^KL8DSHAD^KL02ING^^PN^-

^PY^^V05,05,000I^KLC2G^KHP^^PN^-

mask.ex3

143

Chapter

Command Codes

^PY^^E05,05,000IGP^KL9BIGP^KLFFIGP^KLF1IGP^KH^^PN^-

mask.

^PY^^U03,03,000ING^KL01SHAD^KL04DOWN-^KL8CSIDE^KL02UP^KH^^PN^-

mask

Special Function Control Code Change
Purpose

Changes the current Special Function Control Code (SFCC).

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) N x (cc)(cc)

Represents the current Special Function Control
Code (SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your
VGL configuration.

Specifies the SFCC Change command. Enter N.

Represents the new SFCC. Enter the ASCII
character for the new SFCC. You can set the SFCC
to any character from 17 through 255.

(cc)-

A Graphics Mode CR using the new SFCC. Enter
the new SFCC, immediately followed by - to end
the command sequence.

Comments
You can also change the SFCC through configuration as
described in your User's Manual.
When the SFCC is changed by the N command, the change is
effective immediately, and the old SFCC is no longer recognized.
When printer power is turned off and on, the SFCC returns to the
configuration default.

144

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined

Example

The following command changes the SFCC from the caret (^) to
the tilde (~).

^N~~-

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined
Purpose

To create specialized standard size symbols.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) z x data (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Create Symbol command. Enter lowercase z.

Represents the symbol being defined. See the
Comments below and Table 19. Enter a lowercase
character from a through g to specify where your
symbol is stored. (Make a note of the
corresponding “Print” Value; you need this number
in your Print Symbols command when you print the
symbol as discussed on page 150.)

data

The data required to define the symbol. Each dot
row of a standard size symbol contains three
character cells comprised of four dot rows each,
which equals a total of 12 dots per row. Since the
standard size symbol can only be 12 dot rows by 12
dot columns, the maximum number of character
cells used to define a standard size symbol is 36
(12 dot rows X 3 character cells per row). ASCII
characters from hex 0 through F are used to
describe the dot pattern for each cell of the symbol.
Enter hex values from 0 through F from Table 20 to
describe the dot pattern.
If more than 36 character cells are input, the extra
data is ignored until a valid terminator, such as
(cc)G, (cc)-, or (cc)* is found.

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command.

145

Chapter

Command Codes

Comments
The zx command creates a special standard sized symbol. When
you are ready to print that symbol, use the Z command as
described on page 150.
The zx command must be within a valid graphics sequence. The
symbol can measure up to 12 dot rows wide by 12 dot columns
high, based on 60 x 72 dots per inch resolution. You can create
and store up to seven standard size symbols in printer memory.
The created symbols remain in memory until they are redefined,
the printer is reset, or the printer power is turned off.

Table 19. Standard Size Symbol Values

146

“Create” Value

“Print” Value

(Registered Trademark Symbol)

(Copyright Symbol)

Symbols, Creating Standard User Defined

Table 20. Hex Codes and Dot Patterns
ASCII Hex Value

Binary Code

Dot Pattern

0000

))))

0001

)))#

0010

))#)

0011

))##

0100

)#))

0101

)#)#

0110

)##)

0111

)###

1000

#)))

1001

#))#

1010

#)#)

1011

#)##

1100

##))

1101

##)#

1110

###)

1111

####

Example

The following example illustrates the creation of the standard size
Registered Trademark symbol defined for "a". The symbol is 12
dot columns wide by 12 rows high.

^PY^-^F^^M0101^za0C0,
330,408,5C8,
924,924,9C4,
944,528,408,
330,0C0^G
^M01,01,000^T0020^Z3^^O^-^PN^-

stdsym.ex

147

Chapter

Command Codes

Symbols, Creating Expanded User Defined
Purpose

To create specialized expanded symbols. An optional fill
command can define large expanded symbols.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) z x ht wd data [f n pattern] (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

The Create Symbol command. Enter lowercase z.

Represents the symbol being defined. Enter an
uppercase character from A through F to specify
where your symbol is stored. (Make a note of this
character; you need it in your Print Symbols
command when you print the symbol as discussed
on page 150.)

Specifies the height of the symbol in dot rows from
001 through 108. If a value of 000 or greater than
108 is entered, it defaults to the maximum value of
108. You must include the leading zeros when
entering this data.

Specifies the width of the symbol in character cells
from 001 through 022. If a value of 000 or greater
than 022 is entered, it defaults to the maximum
value of 022. You must include the leading zeros
when entering this data.

data

The data required to define the symbol. Enter a hex
value of 0 through F to define the dot pattern for
each character cell. (Each character cell is
comprised of 4 dots each.) See Table 20 to select
dot patterns. Since one character cell represents 4
dot columns, the smallest symbol you can create is
4 dot columns wide by 1 dot row high. You can
define up to 2,376 character cells (108 dot rows X
22 character cells per row).
If more than the total of 2,376 character cells are
defined, the extra data is ignored until a valid
terminator, such as (cc)G, (cc)-, or (cc)* is found.

148

(Optional) Fills a specified number of character
cells with a repeated dot pattern. Enter lowercase f.

Specifies the number of character cells to fill. Enter
a decimal value from 0001 through 9999. A value of
0000 fills all remaining cells with a specified dot
pattern.

pattern

Specifies the fill dot pattern. Enter a value from 0
through F from Table 20 to describe the dot pattern.

Symbols, Creating Expanded User Defined

(cc)G

Terminator. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by G, the
universal terminator, or another valid Graphics
Mode command.

NOTE: If a syntax error occurs, or invalid data is entered in the command, the
remaining data in the command sequence is ignored until a sequence
terminator or SFCC is found. If the printer power is turned off or the
printer is reset, all expanded symbol data is deleted.
Comments
The zx command creates an expanded-size symbol. When you
are ready to print the symbol, use the Z command as described
on page 150.
Expanded User Defined Symbols command must be within a
valid graphics sequence. They can measure up to 1-1/2 inches
wide by 1-1/2 inches high, which equals 88 dot columns wide by
108 dot rows high. You can store a maximum of six expanded
symbols in printer memory until the printer is reset or the printer
power is turned off.
Example

The following sample palm tree symbol illustrates the Expanded
User Defined Symbol and the optional fill commands. The symbol
measures 96 dot rows high by 64 dot columns, or 16 character
cells wide, which equals a total of 1,536 character cells.

^PY^^F^^M01,01,020
^zA,096,016
f0112,F,f0004,F,C01,f0009,F,f0004,F,C01,f0009,F,f0003,F,8,f0003,0,1
f0004,F,03f0002,F,f0003,F,8,f0003,0,lf0004,F,03f0002,F
f0002,F,Cf0005,0,3F8,f0003,0,3F,f0002,F,Cf0005,0,3F8,f0003,0,3F
f0004,F,Cf0004,0,8,f0005,0,F,f0004,F,Cf0004,0,8,f0005,0,F
f0005,F,Cf0009,0,F,f0005,F,Cf0009,0,F,f0006,F,8f0006,0,f0003,F
f0006,F,8f0006,0,f0003,F,f0005,F,f0007,0,f0004,F,f0005,F,f0007,0,f000F
f0003,F,Cf0009,0,3f0002,F,f0003,F,Cf0009,0,3f0002,F,f0003,F,f0011,0,f0002,F
f0003,F,f0011,0,f0002,F,f0002,F,Cf0011,0,3F,f0002,F,Cf0011,0,3F
f0002,F,f0013,0,F,f0002,F,f0013,0,F,FCf0013,0,F,FCf0013,0,F
FC0,0Ff0010,0,F,FC0,0Ff0010,0,F,F03,FCf0006,0,FF01F,F03,FCf0006,0,FF01F
E3FF,f0007,0,1FF3F,E3FF,f0007,0,1FF3F,CFFC,f0008,0,3F7F,CFFC,f0008,0,3F7F
f0003,F,Cf0009,0,f0003,F,f0003,F,Cf0009,0,f0003,F,f0003,F,800,FCf0005,0,7FF
f0003,F,800,FCF0005,0,7FF,f0003,F,003FE,007C,03FF,f0003,F,003FE,007C,03FF
FFE,00,7FF,003,F80,FF,FFE,00,7FF,003,F80,FF,FFC,00,f0003,F,003,FE0FF
FFC,00,f0003,F,003,FE0FF,FF803,f0003,F,001,FF0FF,FF803,f0003,F,001,FF0FF
FF00,f0004,F,800,FFCFF,FF00,f0004,F,800,FFCFF,FF03,f0004,F800,FFDFF
FF03,f0004,F800,FFDFF,FF8,f0005,F,800,f0005,F,FF8,f0005,F,800,f0005,F
FFB,f0005,F,C00,f0005,F,FFB,f0005,F,C00,f0005,F,f0008,F,C007,f0004,F
f0008,F,8003,f0004,F,f0008,F,8003,f0004,F,f0008,F,8003,f0004,F
f0008,F,8003,f0004,F,f0008,F,8003,f0004,F,f0008,F,8003,f0004,F
f0008,F,0001,f0004,F,f0008,F,0001,f0004,F,f0008,F,0001,f0004,F
f0008,F,0001,f0004,F,f0008,F,0001,f0004,F,f0008,F,0001,f0004,F
f0007,F,E0000,f0004,F,f0007,F,E0000,f0004,F,f0007,F,Ef0004,0,f0004,F
f0007,F,Ef0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F
f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,Cf0004,0,f0004,F,f0007,F,f0005,0,f0004,F
f0007,F,f0005,0,f0004,F,f0000,F^G
^M01,01^ZA^-^*^*^*
^PN^-

149

Chapter

Command Codes

Symbols, Printing
Purpose

Prints specialized Standard or Expanded sized symbols
previously created using the zx commands described on
pages 145 and 148, respectively.

Mode

Graphics with an Extended Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) Z n (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL configuration.

The Print Symbol command. Enter uppercase Z.

Represents the symbol to print. See Table 19 on
page 146. Enter the number 1 to print the registered trademark symbol; enter the number 2 to print
the copyright symbol; enter the User Defined number from 3 through 9 which corresponds to the
alphabetical value (“a” through “g”) you specified
where the standard sized symbol is stored; or,
enter an upper case character from A through F to
select the corresponding Expanded User Defined
Symbol.
For example, in the program example shown on
page 147, the symbol was created and stored at “a”
(^za); when the symbol was printed, it was
specified as 3 (^Z3).

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
The standard alphanumerics command must be input prior to the
Z command. The alphanumeric height and width parameters do
not affect the symbol. Horizontal tabs and justification commands
and parameters affect symbol position.

150

Tab, Horizontal

Specialized standard and expanded symbols are printable only in
the horizontal orientation and are printed according to the size
specification when the symbol was created. However, you can
rotate the standard Registered Trademark symbol and Copyright
Symbol when the Append Rotated configuration parameter is
enabled. Refer to the VGL configuration parameters tables in
your User's Manual.
Blank spacing occurs between plotted elements if an undefined
number or character is assigned to a symbol in the Z command.
Specialized symbols created with the zx command remain in
memory until the printer is reset or the printer power is turned off.
Printing a specialized symbol after the data is lost causes VGL to
react as if the symbol was created with null data, and blank
spaces print in the place of the symbol.
Example

The following sample commands illustrate the standard symbols.
Notice that the standard alphanumerics command was sent for
symbol positioning.

^PY^^M02,02,000^DCopyright ^Z2 1986^^M03,03,000ACME MOTOR ^Z1 Inc.^^PN^-

Tab, Horizontal
Purpose

Specifies a new horizontal print position relative to the left page
margin.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard or an Extended Graphics Command
selected

Format

(cc) T dis [(cc)-]
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The Horizontal Tab command. Enter T.
^T as a Standard Graphics command sets a
"permanent" left Graphics margin for the start of all
Extended Graphics command sequences.
A ^T as an Extended Graphics command adds to
this "permanent" margin.

151

Chapter

Command Codes

dis

Normal Resolution:
Defines the horizontal tab in tenths of an inch plus
dot columns from the left margin. Enter a three-digit
value ranging from 000 through 999 to define a tab
from 00.0 through 99.9 inches from the left margin
and a fourth digit ranging from 0 through 9 to
specify 0 through 9 additional dot columns. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits for tenth inches and
automatically interprets the fourth digit as dot
columns. For example, 0120 (or 012,0) specifies a
1.2-inch plus no-dot column tab; 1016 (or 101,6)
specifies a 10.1-inch plus 6-dot column tab.
High Resolution:
Defines the horizontal tab in thousandth inches.
Enter a five-digit horizontal value ranging from
00000 through 99999 to define a horizontal tab of
0.000 inch through 99.999 inches. VGL
automatically understands the decimal between the
second and third digits.
The data to print at the new print position is input
following the Horizontal Tab command.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR used as a sequence terminator.
Enter the SFCC for your VGL configuration
immediately followed by - to end the command
sequence.

NOTE: The (cc)- sequence terminator is used only when ^T is a Standard
Graphics command.
Comments
The T command may be input as part of the data in one of the
alphanumeric commands and also may be used in standard
graphics mode.
A 2-inch tab specifies a position 2 inches from the left margin; a
6-inch tab specifies a position 6 inches from the left margin, etc.
Since the tab specifies a print position relative to the left print
margin, you can use tabs to specify a print position to the left or
right of the current position (unlike a typewriter, which can only
tab to the right of the current position). For example, if the current
print position is 4 inches from the left margin and a 1-inch tab is
specified, the next print position is 1 inch from the left margin.
This left/right capability is useful for positioning data within boxes
of a form or similar applications.

152

Tab, Horizontal

Examples The following sample shows an Extended Graphics command
placed before and after the ^T command. Notice that the left
margin changes:
^M1010ABC^^T0100^^M1010ABC^-

ABC
ABC

Permanent
Left Margin

The following sample commands illustrate horizontal tabs in
normal resolution.
^PY^^M05,05,000Aa^T020,5Bb^T040,5Cc^-PN^-

^PY^-^F^^M05,05,000Aa^T030,0Bb
^M10,05,050^T005,0Cc^T025,0Dd^^O^-^PN^-

^PY^^V05,05,000I^V10,30,050^T010,0G^V05,05,075^T030,5P^^PN^-

153

Chapter

Command Codes

^PY^^E05,05,000IGP^T025,5IGP^^PN^-

NOTE: Due to space constraints, the ^U commands below are separated into
three lines. During actual VGL input, do not separate your command
parameters.
^PY^-^F^^U06,05,000UP
^U03,03,070^T010,0SIDE
^U05,05,000^T022,0DOWN^^O^-^PN^-

154

Tab, Vertical

Tab, Vertical
NOTE: The Vertical Tab command is not supported on L7032 printers.
Purpose

Performs a vertical tab (VT, hex 0B) function to advance the
paper to the next vertical tab position when used to terminate a
standard graphics command.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc)+
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

The graphics vertical tab mnemonic. Enter +.

Comments
The vertical tab functions as a carriage return only when it is used
to terminate a graphics sequence in an extended graphics
command when Free Format is enabled.
The vertical tab functions as a line feed:
•

when the vertical tab is not used as a graphics command
or graphics function terminator; and

•

when the EVFU is not loaded through the use of form
length or host commands.

If the EVFU is loaded but channel 12 is not loaded, then the
vertical tab functions as a line feed. If channel 12 of the EVFU is
loaded, the vertical tab skips to channel 12.
See “Electronic Vertical Format Unit (EVFU)” on page 73 for
more information on EVFU and channel 12.

155

Chapter

Command Codes

Underlined Print
Purpose

Selects underlined printing.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ U (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Underlined Print command. Enter U
and all characters on the line are underlined.
Underlined print is automatically reset upon receipt
of the line terminator.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

Comments
Underlined print is a line-by-line print attribute; it is selected once
and all characters in the line are underlined. The U command
must precede any printable data in the line, and it is automatically
reset when a line terminator is received.
Example

The following example illustrates underlined print.

^PY^Standard Characters in the Graphics Mode^*
^@U^-Underlined characters: ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ^*
^PN^-

156

Wait For Online

Wait For Online
NOTE: The Wait For Online command is not supported on L7032 printers.
Purpose

Causes VGL to discontinue processing data until you put the
printer offline and then back online.

Mode

Graphics with a Standard Graphics Command selected

Format

(cc) @ W (cc)(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Specifies one of the @ commands. Enter @ to
begin an @ command function.

Specifies the Wait For Online command. Enter W
and the front panel displays "Waiting on User" until
you place the printer offline.

(cc)-

Graphics Mode CR. Enter the SFCC for your VGL
configuration immediately followed by - to end the
command sequence.

NOTE: Wait For Online must be given while VGL is in graphics mode (^PY),
but not inside of a graphics pass (^M.....^-).

157

Chapter

158

Command Codes

Barcodes

Overview
A barcode is a graphic representation of alphanumeric characters. Barcodes
are produced by entering a barcode command to VGL in the Graphics mode
using an Extended Graphics command.
You can print the barcodes horizontally, vertically, with or without a human
readable data field, with default bar/space ratios, or with variable ratios. The
human readable data field may be printed using any of the Extended
Graphics command fonts available with the (cc)S or (cc)IFONT, commands.
Barcode symbols are configured in a series of varying width bars and spaces
representing a specific barcode character set. These characteristics are in
accordance with established industry-wide practices.
Several integrity checks are performed against the barcode data, and error
messages are printed if any illegal data is discovered.
Each type of barcode has a different set of characters that can be barcoded,
and VGL ensures that the data falls within the allowable set. Some barcodes
permit a variable number of data characters, while other barcodes require a
fixed number of data characters. VGL ensures that the data adheres to these
constraints.
NOTE: Be sure you have set the proper printer mode as described in
Chapter 2.
The single most important consideration when printing a barcode is to ensure
the barcode will be scanned properly. Incorporating a barcode quality
procedure in the printing process is the best way to ensure that barcodes are
being printed correctly. A properly implemented validation procedure will
increase overall barcode quality, reduce waste from misprinted barcodes, and
Printronix achieve high first-time read rates, which is an increasingly
important factor in newer, more efficient systems where manually entered
data is not acceptable as a backup function. Validation also minimizes the
costs of returned products due to poor reading or unaccountable barcodes.
For more information on barcode validation, contact your Printronix
representative, or visit our web site at www.printronix.com.

159

Chapter

Overview

Examples
Using different printers may affect the printed appearance of your print
samples compared to those shown in this manual due to the printer's scaling
factor and varying print mode/densities. Print position also depends on your
paper top-of-form position and the initial print position. Therefore, the location
of the barcode print samples in this chapter are for reference only and do not
reflect the actual barcode print position.

Barcode Size/Height Requirements
The length of any barcode is based on several factors:
(1) the type of barcode
(2) the number of data characters encoded
(3) the bar/space ratios
The starting position of a barcode is determined by any justifications specified
in the previous alphanumeric command.
The alphanumeric command provides the proper length (height) of the bars in
barcodes.
For horizontal barcodes, the graphics height command specifies barcode
height; for vertical barcodes, graphics width specifies barcode height.
Barcode height/width parameters are specified in the two-digit extended
graphics command. A decimal point is automatically interpreted between the
first and second character digits.
HEIGHT

DATA FIELD
(No readable
Barcode
data field)

DATA FIELD
(No Readable
Data Field)
Barcode

Figure 3. Barcode Size/Height Requirements

160

HEIGHT

Barcode Size/Height Requirements

VGL allows you to add a human readable data field to the barcode. Also, you
can specify a 1 or 3 dot gap between the human readable field and the
barcode.
When you insert a human readable field, the height of the barcode
automatically shortens. For example, you print a barcode that is 1" high.
Later, you add a human readable data field. The barcode height is 1" minus
the 1 or 3 dot gap and the text, which is 1/10" or 1/5".
If the barcode height is less than the height of the human readable text, the
barcode height adjusts to the height of one dot. The gap and the human
readable text remain the same.
Horizontal barcode data is printed below the barcode; vertical barcode data is
printed to the left of the barcode. Figure 4 illustrates the readable data
adjustment feature.
HEIGHT
1-3 DOT
GAP

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA FIELD

DATA
FIELD
(Bar
Code)

HEIGHT

DATA FIELD
(Bar Code)
1-3 DOT GAP
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 4. Barcode Height Adjustment

161

Chapter

Barcode Command Format

Barcode Command Format
Barcode commands are Extended Graphics commands which must occur
within the Graphics Mode and must be introduced by an SFCC and one of the
four alphanumeric commands (^M, ^V, ^E, and ^U). Data provided in the
alphanumeric command sequence identifies specific height, width, and
justification information used to define barcode length (height) and position.
Complete alphanumeric command information is explained in Chapter 2.
NOTE: Throughout this manual, the caret (^) is used to represent the Special
Function Control Code introducer and terminator for graphics and
barcode commands. Be sure to use the appropriate control character
for your VGL configuration.
VGL offers a choice between two types of barcode command formats which
are described on the following pages: Standard (^B and ^C) barcode format,
and IBARC, (a QMS Version II command). Two advantages of IBARC are a 4way rotation, not 2-way, and dot or printer dot resolution for variable ratio
barcodes. Neither the Standard nor IBARC format offers significantly more or
less features; both formats accomplish the same task. The format you select
is a matter of personal choice. In each barcode section throughout this
chapter, each of the command parameters is fully described and examples
provided using the standard barcode format (^B and ^C).
You can also print high resolution barcodes. With the control panel menu
option, “Var Ratio Barcd” set to “High Resolution”, barcode variable ratio data
can be specified in printer dots. You can use this option in either high or
normal resolution with the IBARC command. (This option is ignored for ^B
and ^C which always use low resolution.)
If “Var Ratio Barcd” is set to “Low Resolution” (the default), the barcode
variable ratio data is interpreted as line matrix printer dots (60x72 dpi).
NOTE: When using variable ratio barcode commands, you must ensure the
“scanability” of your barcodes, including toner spread compensation.
Make sure the variable ratio conforms to the specification.
The barcode command and associated parameters for standard barcodes are
described on page 163. IBARC, barcodes, associated parameters and
examples are described on page 164.
NOTE: Each barcode parameter is visually separated by spaces, and
optional parameters are marked by paired brackets [ ]; do not enter
these spaces or brackets in your command sequence; they are
provided throughout the manual for clarity in distinguishing
parameters. Italicized text represents a variable parameter for which
a value must be inserted. Command parameters not italicized must
be input exactly as shown.

162

Standard Barcode Command Format

Standard Barcode Command Format
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field by selecting
one of five codes representing the font and gap
size for the readable data field. The readable data
field is printed below a horizontally configured
barcode (picket fence orientation) and on the lefthand side of a vertically configured barcode (ladder
orientation). The barcode size is automatically
adjusted to allow for the height of the data field font
and the spacing between the data and barcode.

NOTE: Vertical barcodes print only in standard 10 cpi font because OCR
fonts cannot be rotated. If an OCR-type font is selected with a vertical
barcode command, the standard 10 cpi font is substituted
automatically.
9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications. Enter the number
9 to select variable ratio barcodes represented in
line matrix printer dots (60 x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

type

Represents the barcode type from Table 21 on
page 167. Invalid codes are treated as errors.

ratio

Represents unique ratio data for variable ratio
barcodes. The default ratios shown in Table 21 are
overridden by this feature. Four- and eight-digit
ratios are used, depending upon the barcode
selected.

data

Represents the data to be barcoded.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

163

Chapter

Barcode Command Format

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format
Default Ratio:

(cc) IBARC, type, loc, data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) IBARC, type, [R [D] ratio,] loc, data (cc)G

When using the IBARC, barcode command format, the type code changes
from a single alphanumeric value to a mnemonic as shown in Table 21. Using
the appropriate alphanumeric command (^M, ^V, ^E, and ^U), IBARC,
barcodes allow you to print barcodes in four orientations: horizontal, or rotated
90, 180 or 270 degrees. In addition, a loc parameter allows you to select one
of three ways in which the printable data field appears below the barcode.
The barcode command parameters applicable to IBARC, barcodes are
defined below. At the end of this section, several IBARC, examples are
provided illustrating applications for these parameters.
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

IBARC,

The Barcode command. Enter IBARC, (the comma
is required).

type,

Represents the IBARC, barcode type from Table
21. Invalid codes are treated as errors.

[R [D] ratio,] Optional parameter representing the ratios for
variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios shown in
Table 21 are overridden by the variable ratio
feature. Four- and eight-digit ratios can be used,
depending upon the barcode selected. Ratio data
must be decimal values from 0 through 99. Enter R,
followed by the actual barcode ratio. A colon must
separate each element of the ratio.
Like standard barcode ratios, IBARC, ratios are
also interpreted from left to right, measuring the
size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the
following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide
bar : wide space.
If Variable Ratio Barcode is set to High Resolution
or if the D parameter is specified, the ratios are
represented in actual printer dots instead of line
matrix printer dots (60 x 72 dpi).
NOTE: VGL does not verify that ratio data creates acceptable wide/narrow
element relationships for barcode readability. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
loc

164

Represents the location of the printable data field.
Enter N for no printable data field, E to have the
data field embedded in the barcode, or B to print
the data field below the barcode. If this parameter
is selected, the printable data field prints in the
current font as selected by the (cc)S or (cc)IFONT
commands or the default font selected.

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format

data

Represents the data to be barcoded. The maximum
amount of data depends on which barcode has
been selected from Table 21.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

IBARC, Examples
The following examples illustrate use of the IBARC, command format using
Code 39. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. Refer to Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
Example 1 Code 39 horizontal barcode with embedded printable data field:
^PY^-^M05,05,000^IBARC,C39,E,12345^G^-^PN^-

ibarc.

Example 2 Code 39 barcode rotated 90° with printable data field printed
below the barcode.
^PY^-^V05,05,000^IBARC,C39,B,12345^G^-^PN^-

ibarc.ex2

Example 3 Code 39 barcode rotated 180° with printable data field printed
below the barcode.
^PY^-^U05,05,000^IBARC,C39,B,12345^G^-^PN^ibarc.ex

165

Chapter

Barcode Command Format

Example 4 Code 39 barcode rotated 270° with embedded printable data
field.
^PY^-^E05,05,000^IBARC,C39,E,12345^G^-^PN^-

ibarc.ex4

Example 5 Code 39 barcode rotated 90° with no printable data field.
^PY^-^V05,05,000^IBARC,C39,N,12345^G^-^PN^-

ibarc.ex5

Example 6 Code 39 horizontal barcode, embedded printable data field, and
double the default ratio:
^PY^-^M05,05,000^IBARC,C39,R2:2:6:6,E,12345^G^-^PN^-

166

IBARC, (Version II) Barcode Command Format

Barcodes
NOTE: When using standard barcode types (either (cc) B or (cc) C) select
the appropriate type code from the Standard Type Code column in
Table 21. When using the IBARC, barcode, select the appropriate
type code from the IBARC, Type Code column in Table 21.
Table 21. VGL Barcode Types
Barcode
Description

Standard
Type Code

IBARC,
Type Code

# of Data

Check Digits

Default Bar/
Space Ratios

Page
#

Australian
4-State

AUSTPOST

Varied

None

n/a

169

BC 412

BC412

Varied

Mod 35

1:1

174

Codabar

CBAR

1-40

None

1:2:3:4:1:1:1:1

178

Code 39

A
B
C

C39
LOGMAR
AIAG
EMBARC
C39A
C39M43
HIBCC

1-40
1-40
1-40
1-40
1-40
1-40
1-40

None
None
None
None
None
Mod 43
Mod 43

1:1:3:3
1:1:3:3
1:1:3:3
1:1:3:3
1:2:4:5
1:1:3:3
1:1:3:3

184

Code 93

C93

1-40

Mod 47

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

191

Code 128

C128

1-40

Mod 103

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

195

EAN 8
EAN 8+2
EAN 8+5

U
o
p

EAN8
EAN8+2
EAN8+5

7
9
12

Mod 10

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

204

EAN 13
EAN 13+2
EAN 13+5

T
m
n

EAN13
EAN13+2
EAN13+5

12
14
17

Mod 10

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

209

German
Interleaved 2/5

V
W

POSTAGI
POSTAGL

11
13

Mod 10

4:6:14:16

214

GS1-128,
formerly
UCC/EAN-128

UCC128

see Note
below

Mod 103/10

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

219

GS-1
Datamatrix,
formerly
Datamatrix

DATAMATRIX

Varied

n/a

230

Identicon

IDENTICON

1-40

None

1:1:3

239

Intelligent Mail
4-state

INTMAIL

20-31

Automatic

n/a

242

167

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 21. VGL Barcode Types (continued)
Barcode
Description

Standard
Type Code

Interleaved 2/5

K
k
L
l

Maxicode

IBARC,
Type Code

# of Data

Check Digits

Default Bar/
Space Ratios

INT2/5
INT2/5CD
INT2/5A
INT2/5CDA

1-40
1-40
1-40
1-40

None
Mod 10
None
Mod 10

1:1:3:3
1:1:3:3
1:2:4:5
1:2:4:5

244

MAXICODE

depends
on mode
used

None

N/A

249

MSI

F
G
H
I
X

MSI
MSI10
MSI1010
MSI1110
MSI11

1-13
1-13
1-13
1-13
1-13

None
Mod 10
Mod 10/10
Mod 11/10
Mod 11

1:1:2:2

254

PDF417

Variable

None

n/a

260

Planet

PLANET

Mod 10

n/a

264

POSTNET

5, 9, or 11

Mod 10

n/a

269

Royal Mail

ROYALBAR

Varied

Mod 6

3:6

273

Telepen

TELEPEN

1-40

Mod 127

1:1:3:3

275

UPC-A
UPC-A+2
UPC-A+5
UPC-A 80%
UPC-A100%

P
a
b
0
1

UPCA
UPCA+2
UPCA+5
UPCA80
UPCA100

11
13
16
11
11

Mod 10
Mod 10
Mod 10

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4
1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4
1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

280

UPC-E
UPC-E0
UPC-E+2
UPC-E+5
UPC-E0+2
UPC-E0+5

Q
R
c
d
e
f

UPCE
UPCE0
UPCE+2
UPCE+5
UPCE0+2
UPCE0+5

10
6
12
15
8
11

Mod 10

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

285

UPCSHIP

Mod 10

1:1:3:3

293

UPS 11

UPS11

Mod 103

1:1:2:2:3:3:4:4

297

NOTE: Data requirements for UCC/EAN-128 is determined by the application
identifier preceding the barcode data. There is a wide range of
selections.

168

Page
#

Australian 4-State

Australian 4-State
The Australian 4-State structure is shown in Figure 5 and described on the
following pages.
QUIET
ZONE
STARTING
POSITION

START
CODE

DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

STARTING
POSITION
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

HEIGHT

QUIET START
ZONE CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE
STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

QUIET
ZONE
HEIGHT

Figure 5. Australian 4-State Structure
The Australian 4-State barcode supports the Australian Postal Service.
Australian 4-State barcodes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space
and width, but have four different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender,
Descender, and Tracker), whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall
and Short).
The Australian 4-State symbology converts alphanumeric characters into
patterns of four bars, using combinations of Full Height, Ascender,
Descender, and Trackers. It also adds start and stop barcodes as well as
Reed-Solomon parity information.

Quiet Zone
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin
and end in a blank area. The quiet zones should be at least 0.25 inches wide
and completely blank to ensure accurate reading of the start/stop codes and
to prevent adjacent barcodes from overlapping. You are responsible for
providing sufficient space on the form for the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop bars identify the orientation of the barcode. The start bar
consists of an ascender bar, and is positioned at the leftmost end of the
barcode. The stop bar consists of a full height bar, and is positioned at the
rightmost end of the barcode adjacent to the check digit.

169

Chapter

Barcodes

Data Field
Australian 4-State barcodes use four types of bars to encode its data: Full
Height, Ascender, Descender, and Tracker. Each Full Height bar is 0.198 inch
± 0.030 inch. The Ascender and Descender bars are about 62.5% of the Full
Height bar in length, while the Tracker bar is about 25% of the Full Height bar.
Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal
spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any
0.50-inch portion of the barcode.
The Australian 4-State barcode data field consists of four different sections:
the FCC, Sorting Number, Customer Data, and Reed-Solomon parity
information. The FCC is a two-digit code specifying the format of the barcode
(see Table 23). The Sorting Number is an 8-digit code used to sort the mail
item. Customer Data is optional and is only allowed on certain formats (as
indicated by the FCC selected). VGL emulation automatically generates the
Reed-Solomon parity information and includes it in the barcode.

Check Digit
No check digit is calculated for the Australian 4-State barcode. The ReedSolomon parity information is automatically included.

Australian 4-State Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions. (This
barcode will not print vertically using the IBARC, command format.)
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p s [Fn] [In] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed left-aligned above a
horizontal barcode or top-aligned to the right of a
vertical barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 22 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

170

Australian 4-State

Table 22. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

The Australian 4-State type code. Enter s.

Specifies the FCC code, which defines the format
of the barcode and its size. If no value is specified,
the FCC defaults to a value of 11. Enter F, then one
of the values shown in Table 23.

Specifies the format of the customer information
field. If no value is specified, the information field
defaults to a value of 1. Enter I, then one of the
values shown in Table 23.

Table 23. FCC Codes, Customer Information Fields
and Maximum Barcode Lengths

FCC (Fn)

Customer
Information (In)

Valid Data

Maximum Length
(Sorting Number +
Customer Data)

11, 87, 45, or 92

n/a

Any

8+0

A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, #

8+5

0-9

8+7

0-3

8 + 15

44, 62

A-Z, a-z, 0-9, space, #

8 + 10

44, 62

0-9

8 + 15

44, 62

0-3

8 + 30

171

Chapter

Barcodes

data

The barcode data. See “Data Field” on page 170
for a description of the Australian 4-State barcode
data field.

NOTE: For a In value of 3, the digits 0 through 3 represent the following bars:
0 = Full Height; 1 = Ascender; 2 = Descender; 3 = Tracker. Since this
is a proprietary encoding, the Customer Data is not included in the
optional readable data field.
(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

Australian 4-State Examples
The following command generates the horizontal Australian 4-State barcode
below. In the command sequence, Graphics Mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,100^KF^BYsF62I100141544adc0grell7^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width selected
was at 1.0 inches.
A 1.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.
Letter s selected Australian 4-State barcode type.
F62 selected an FCC Code value of 62.
I1 selected a customer information field value of 1.
00141544adc0grell7 is the barcode data. 00141544 is the sorting data, and
adc0grell7 is the customer data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

172

Australian 4-State

The following command generated the vertical Australian 4-State barcode
below using standard 10 cpi font, FCC Code value of 59, customer
information field value of 1, and data of 0123456789076 (01234567 is the
sorting data, and 89076 is the customer data):
^PY^-^M10,10,050^KF^CYsF59I10123456789076^G^KF^-^PN^-

173

Chapter

Barcodes

BC412 Barcode
The BC412 barcode was invented by IBM in 1988 to meet the needs of the
the semiconductor wafer identification application. The word BC stands for
binary code (presence or absence of a bar) and 412 means 4 bar modules in
a total of 12 module positions in every character. It is a one dimensional
barcode that meets the requirements of small space, easy scribing and robust
decoding even if the barcode symbols are under poor light contrast. It can
achieve a density of 23 characters in less than an inch with a 3.3 mil bar
width.

Clear Zone
Clear Start
Zone Code

Bar Code Data Field

Stop
Code

Clear
Zone

Clear Zone
Check Character

Data Field
Data BC412 can accommodate 35 characters, 0 - 9 and A - Z. The number 0
is used in place of the letter O. Table 24 lists the character with it’s
corresponding module sequence and character value.

Quiet/Clear Zone
The barcode structure requires a completely blank clear zone which extends
4.75 inches from the right edges of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum
clear zone of 0.040 inch above and below the barcode data must also be
provided.

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop pattern identify the orientation of the barcode. The start
code is bar,space,space” in all cases. The stop code is bar, space, bar for all
cases.
I = Bar
- = Space

174

BC412 Barcode

Table 24. BC412 Character, Module Sequence, and Character Value
Character

Module
Sequence

Character
Value

I-I-I-I-----

I-I-I--I----

I-I-I---I---

I-I-I----I--

I-I-I-----I-

I-I--I-I----

I-I--I--I---

I-I--I---I--

I-I--I----I-

I-I---I-I---

I-I---I--I--

I-I---I---I-

I-I----I-I--

I-I----I--I-

I-I-----I-I-

I--I-I-I----

I--I-I--I---

I--I-I---I--

I--I-I----I-

I--I--I-I---

I--I--I--I--

I--I--I---I-

I--I---I-I--

I--I---I--I-

I--I----I-I-

I---I-I-I---

I---I-I--I--

I---I-I---I-

175

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 24. BC412 Character, Module Sequence, and Character Value
Character

Module
Sequence

Character
Value

I---I--I-I--

I---I--I--I-

I---I---I-I-

I----I-I-I--

I----I-I--I-

I----I--I-I-

I-----I-I-I-

Start

I--

Stop

I-I

Check Code
The BC412 has a mod 35 check character. The check character is placed in
the second position behind the first data character. The check code is
automatically included in the bar structure; however, it is not included in the
PDF. The check digit computation is shown below.
Let D = D1D2....Dn be a string of n data characters and C = C1C2....Cn+1 be
a string value of n+1 encoded characters.
V1 = Character value of C1. Refer to Table 24.
Fo = (Sum of Odd V1) Mod 35
Fe = (Sum of Even V1) Mod 35
F = (Fo + 2Fe) Mod 35
Since the second character is the check character, designate the second
character of C1C2.... as the check character of D.
Set C2 = 0
therefore C1C3C4.... Cn+1 = D1D2D3....Dn.
Calculate Fo, Fe, and F
C2 = the character that has the check character value 17F Mod 35.

176

BC412 Barcode

Example
Assume that the data character string is AQ1557
Form the character string C = A0Q1557
Fo = (7 + 18 + 33 + 21) Mod 35
= 79 Mod 35
=9
Fe = (0 + 11 + 19) Mod 35
= 34 Mod 35
= 34
F = (9 + 2*34) Mod 35
= 77 Mod 35
=7
Character value of the check character is = 17*7 Mod 35
= 119 Mod 35
= 14
As referenced in Table 24, 14 is the character value of character “S.”
Therefore, the check character is “S.”

Barcode Ratio
Default ratio is: 1:1.
Note: The BC412 barcode is not yet available for impact printers.

BC412 Standard Command Format
Default Ratio: (cc) dir N Y data (cc)G
(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

The type code for BC412. Enter +.

data

The barcode data. A check digit is automatically
added by VGL.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

177

Chapter

Barcodes

BC412 Example
The following command generates the horizontal BC412 barcode below:
^PY^-^M05.05.100^T0100^BN+12345ABCDE^G^-^PN^-

Codabar
The Codabar structure is shown in Figure 6 and described on the following
pages.

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

LOWER
GUARD
BAND
STARTING
POSITION
STOP
CODE

HEIGHT

QUIET START
ZONE CODE

DATA FIELD
LOWER GUARD BAND
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

QUIET
ZONE
HEIGHT

Figure 6. Codabar Structure

178

Codabar

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. Four
start/stop code characters (A, B, C, and D) are available in any combination
as start/stop codes. The start/stop code character must be included in the
data field to be produced with the barcode.

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent numeric characters and six control characters. Each character is
represented by seven elements consisting of four bars and three spaces,
either wide or narrow.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol
and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided
when the readable data field is selected.

Codabar Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p D data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] D [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 25 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

179

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 25. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None
9 or :

N
Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

The Codabar type code. Enter D.

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. The default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F; VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however, a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide/narrow ratios to conform to readable
barcodes.

180

Codabar

Codabar barcodes require an eight-digit ratio. The
ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring
the size of each bar or space in dot width. The first
four digits are interpreted as follows: narrow bar :
narrow space : wide bar : wide space. The sixth
digit specifies the number of dots for the
intercharacter spacing. The fifth, seventh and
eighth digits are not used; any data in these
positions is ignored. For example, if the Codabar
ratio data was 24681211, it would be translated as
follows:
2-dot-wide narrow bar
4-dot-wide narrow space
6-dot-wide wide bar
8-dot-wide wide space
ignore data
2-dot-wide intercharacter spacing
ignore data
ignore data
data

The barcode data. Codabar encodes from 1
through 40 characters from the Codabar Character
Set shown in Table 26. Characters A, B, C, and D
are strictly start/stop codes.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

Table 26. Codabar Character Set
Character

Hex

Character

Hex

*A, B, C and D are start/stop codes only.

181

Chapter

Barcodes

Codabar Examples
The following command generates the horizontal variable ratio Codabar
barcode below. In the command sequence, Graphics Mode data is italicized
and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYDA2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

codabar.ex1

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width selected
was at 1.0 inches.
A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.
Letter D selected Codabar barcode type.
A2468B is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the horizontal Codabar barcode below
using OCR-B font, double the default ratio, and data of A2468B:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BB9D24681211A2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

182

Codabar

The following commands generated the vertical Codabar barcodes below
using standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of A2468B:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYDA2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

codab

The following command generates the same vertical Codabar barcode
described above, except that double the default ratio is used:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9D24681211A2468B^G^KF^-^PN^-

codabar.e

183

Chapter

Barcodes

Code 39
The Code 39 structure is shown in Figure 7 and described on the following
pages.

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

STARTING
POSITION

LOWER
GUARD
BAND
QUIET START
ZONE CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

STOP
CODE

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

QUIET
ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 7. Code 39 Structure

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from
overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for
the quiet zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop code is a unique character identifying the leading and trailing
end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
barcode. The start/stop code structure permits bidirectional barcode
scanning.

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each wide or narrow bar or
space is 1 element; each character in the data field has 9 elements. The
structure is 3 wide elements (bars or spaces) out of the 9 total elements that
compose one character.

184

Code 39

Check Digit
Code 39 Type C inserts the modulo-43 check digit into the barcode. This
feature provides a means of verifying accurate scanning.

Code 39 Command Format
NOTE: Refer to page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes in Table 27 to print the readable data field in
the corresponding font with the specified guard
band gap.

Table 27. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

185

Chapter

Barcodes

9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

type

Selects the barcode type. Code 39 types available
are shown in Table 28. Enter the Type Code
corresponding to the Code 39 type desired.

Table 28. Code 39 Barcodes
Standard
Type Code

IBARC,
Type Code

# of Data
Characters

Check
Digits

Default Bar/
Space Ratios*

Ratio

C39

1-40

None

1:1:3:3

1:3

C39A

1-40

None

1:2:4:5

1:3

C39M43

1-40

Mod 43

1:1:3:3

1:3

LOGMAR

1-40

None

1:1:3:3

HIBCC

1-40

Mod 43

1:1:3:3

AIAG

1-40

None

1:1:3:3

EMBARC

1-40

None

1:1:3:3

* Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:
Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.
ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with
parameter 9 or : ) representing the ratios for
variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios are
overridden by the variable ratio feature. The ratio
data must be hexadecimal numbers from 0 through
9 or A through F. VGL automatically checks the
input for validity. If an invalid character is found in
the ratio, an error message is generated.
Code 39 barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios
are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size
of each bar or space, in dot width according to the
following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide
bar : wide space. For example, enter 2266 in the
ratio parameter for:

186

Code 39

2 dot-wide narrow bar
2 dot-wide narrow space
6 dot-wide wide bar
6 dot-wide wide space.
NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. Code 39 encodes 1 through 40
characters from the Code 39 full ASCII Character
Set shown in Table 29.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

187

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 29. Code 39 Character Set
ASCII

CODE 39

ASCII

CODE 39

ASCII

CODE 39

ASCII

CODE 39

NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL
BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR
SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3
DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM
SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

%U
$A
$B
$C
$D
$E
$F
$G
$H
$I
$J
$K
$L
$M
$N
$O
$P
$Q
$R
$S
$T
$U
$V
$W
$X
$Y
$Z
%A
%B
%C
%D
%E

SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
,
—
.
/
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
:
;
<
=
>
?

Space
/A
/B
/C
/D
/E
/F
/G
/H
/I
/J
/K
/L
—
.
/O
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
/Z
%F
%G
%H
%I
%J

@
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
__

%V
A
B
C
D
E
F
G
H
I
J
K
L
M
N
O
P
Q
R
S
T
U
V
W
X
Y
Z
%K
%L
%M
%N
%O

`
a
b
c
d
e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x
y
z
{
|
}
^
DEL

%W
+A
+B
+C
+D
+E
+F
+G
+H
+I
+J
+K
+L
+M
+N
+O
+P
+Q
+R
+S
+T
+U
+V
+W
+X
+Y
+Z
%P
%Q
%R
%S
%T %X
%Y %Z

NOTE: Character pairs /M, /N, and /P through /Y are reserved for future
control character pairs.

188

Code 39

Code 39 Examples
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Code 39
barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is
italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed
description of alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYA$25NW20%^G^KF^-^PN^-

code39.

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.
Letter A selected Code 39 Type A.
$25NW20% is the barcode data, and ^G terminated the barcode command
sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print, and ^PN^terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the horizontal Code 39 barcode below
using OCR-A font, double the default ratio, and data of $25NW20%:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BO9A2266$25NW20%^G^KF^-^PN^-

code39.ex

189

Chapter

Barcodes

The following commands generated the vertical Code 39 barcodes below
using standard 10 cpi font, the standard default ratio, and data of $25:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYB$25^G^KF^-^PN^-

code3

The following command generates the same vertical Code 39 barcode
described above, except that double the default ratio is used:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9B248A$25^G^KF^-^PN^-

code39.ex4

190

Code 93

Code 93
The Code 93 structure is shown in Figure 8 and described on the following
pages.

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

STARTING
POSITION

LOWER
GUARD
BAND
QUIET START
ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

QUIET
ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 8. Code 93 Structure

Data Fields
The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent the full ASCII character set. Bars and spaces vary in width from 1
through 4 modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and two spaces that
total 7 modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the
right data field to permit read direction sensing.

191

Chapter

Barcodes

Check Digit
Code 93 inserts the modulo-47 check digit into the barcode. This feature
provides a means of verifying accurate scanning.

Code 93 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p i data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] i [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
following codes to print the readable data field in
the corresponding font with the specified guard
band gap.

Table 30. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

192

Code 93

9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

The type code for Code 93. Enter i.

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with
parameter 9 or :) representing the ratios for
variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios are
overridden by the variable ratio feature. The ratio
data must be hexadecimal numbers from 0 through
9 or A through F. VGL automatically checks the
input for validity. If an invalid character is found in
the ratio, an error message is generated.
Code 93 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios
are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size
of each bar or space in dot width, in the following
pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :
2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3
module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module
wide bar : 4 module wide space. For example,
enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:
2 module wide bar
2 module wide space
4 module wide bar
4 module wide space
6 module wide bar
6 module wide space
8 module wide bar
8 module wide space

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable bar/space element relationships for barcode
readability. When designing unique ratio data, carefully plot bar/
space ratios to conform to readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. Code 93 encodes from 1
through 40 characters. They can be any ASCII
characters 0-127.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

193

Chapter

Barcodes

Code 93 Example
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Code 93
barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is
italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed
description of alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^F^^M1010100^IBARC,C93,B,1234ABCD^G^^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^F^- enabled Free Format.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 1.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data
placement.
^IBARC, introduced the barcode command.
C93, selected Code 93.
B, prints the readable data field below the barcode.
1234ABCD is the barcode data, and ^G^- terminated the barcode command
sequence.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

194

Code 128

Code 128
Code 128 includes three subsets: A, B, and C. All contain the same bar
patterns, except for the unique start character instructing the barcode reader
which subset is being used. Special characters are available for switching
between the subsets in order to generate the shortest possible barcode. The
Code 128 structure is shown in Figure 9 and described on the following
pages.

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

CHECK
DIGIT
FIELD

CHECK DIGIT
FIELD

STARTING
POSITION
QUIET START
ZONE CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

LOWER
GUARD
BAND

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE
QUIET
ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 9. Code 128 Structure

Start/Stop Codes
Code 128 contains special characters which use unique start/stop codes to
identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. In the automatic mode,
start and stop codes are generated automatically. In the manual mode, you
must supply the start code, but the stop code is generated automatically.

195

Chapter

Barcodes

Data Field
Code 128 barcodes support a full ASCII character set: Subset A provides
standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, control and special characters;
subset B includes all standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lowercase
alphabetical characters, and special characters; subset C provides 100 digit
pairs, from 00 through 99 inclusive, plus special characters. Table 32 lists the
full Code 128 character set.
Control characters, identified by a “greater than” (>) symbol, introduce Special
Function Control Codes so that you can manually supply control codes to shift
between subsets as described in the “Mode Selection” section, below. The
bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4 modules. Each character
consists of 3 bars and 3 spaces that total 11 modules.

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol,
and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided
when the readable data field is selected. The readable data field is available
only in the automatic mode.

Check Digit
For Code 128, the modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and
inserted in the barcode symbol. The check digit verifies accurate scanning.
The start code is included in the check digit algorithm.

Mode Selection
VGL generates Code 128 barcodes in one of two modes: automatic or
manual.

Automatic Mode
VGL creates the shortest possible barcode by automatically sending the
subset switch characters (characters preceded by >) to switch from subset B
into subset C whenever strings of four or more consecutive numeric
characters are provided. As long as the data includes ordinary keyboard
characters and no subset switch, VGL switches in and out of subsets B and C
automatically before and after numeric character strings. Start codes, stop
codes, and check digits are generated automatically.
NOTE: The code >0 is not a special character; VGL recognizes >0 as the
“greater than” character (>) on a standard ASCII chart.

196

Code 128

Manual Mode
The manual mode is selected by inputting a subset switch character
(characters preceded by >) anywhere in the barcode data. In the manual
mode, you must insert the special codes into the barcode command to switch
to another subset. Once a special code is found in the data, all automatic
switching features are suspended, the readable data field option is cancelled,
and VGL expects you to provide all special code switching commands. In this
mode, you must supply the start code; if no start code is provided, VGL
inserts a subset B start code. Stop codes and check digits are generated
automatically in the manual mode. More information about Manual Mode is
provided in the following section.

Manual Mode Operation
NOTE: In the manual mode, you are responsible for correct implementation
of Code 128 in accordance with the Code 128 Standards Manual.
The Code 128 character set is shown in Table 32. The Alternate column
identifies the special subset switch characters that switch VGL to the manual
mode. These > characters are also horizontally aligned with functions also
performed in an automatic mode. For example, >/ represents SI in subset A, o
in subset B, and value 79 in subset C. Thus, the following commands
generate the same barcode using Alternate characters, or subsets B or C:
Subset Switch Characters:
Subset C:
Subset B:

^BNZ>7>,>->.>/^G
^BNZ>576777879^G
^BNZ>6lmno^G

Non-ASCII characters are specified by using the subset switch characters
(from >1 through >8 in the Alternate column on Table 32) which corresponds
to your application. The Value column is used when manually translating
subset B and C barcodes into their briefest form.
NOTE: The subset switch start codes, >5, >6, and >7 have two functions. At
the beginning of a line, they start manual mode data in subset C, B, or
A, respectively. When these codes are used anywhere in the data
other than at the start of a line, they are interpreted as the non-ASCII
characters in Table 32.

Subset B and C Switching
In the automatic mode, VGL creates the briefest, most compact barcode by
automatically switching from subset B to subset C. For example, the data
LT436682 could be entered directly into a typed barcode command as
^BNZLT436682^G. VGL automatically selects the appropriate start code, and
switches to subset C to compact the continuous numeric data characters
(436682).
In the manual mode, however, you must specify the start code and all special
function codes to switch subsets. For example, to create the same barcode as
generated automatically in the previous paragraph (data of LT436682), the
subset B start code is entered, followed by the alpha data (LT), and the
subset switch character to switch to subset C is entered followed by the
continuous numeric characters. A typical barcode command, in the manual
mode, for the data is: ^BNZ>6LT>5Kbr^G. The pairs of continuous numeric

197

Chapter

Barcodes

data were manually translated to subset B, data Kbr, corresponding to the
subset C values of 436682, respectively, as shown in Table 32. If the data
(LT436682) had been entered directly into the barcode command as
^BNZ>6LT>5436682, the barcode generated would have been: Start Code B:
LT, subset C: 20 19 22 22 24 18, as determined by the value of the individual
data characters in Table 32.
NOTE: If a start code is not entered in the manual mode, VGL provides a
subset B start code.

Subset A
Subset A operates in the manual mode only. Subset A data characters
include mostly normal printable ASCII characters which require no subset
switching and can be entered directly. For example, the data ABC123 in
subset A is input in the barcode command as: ^BNZ>7ABC123^. Switching to
another subset does not generate a shorter barcode.
Non-printable control characters in subset A can be generated by either: 1)
using the subset B lowercase character equivalent from Table 32 (` through o)
or 2) using the subset switch characters (>1 through >8, or >SP through >/)
from the Alternate column of Table 32.

Code 128 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p Z data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] Z [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 31 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

198

Code 128

Table 31. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None
9 or :

N
Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter: to select variable ratio barcodes represented
in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or 300 x 300
dpi, depending on the printer head being used).

The Code 128 type code. Enter Z.

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F; VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.
Code 128 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The
ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring
the size of each bar or space in dot width, in the
following pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module
wide space : 2 module wide bar : 2 module wide
space : 3 module wide bar : 3 module wide space :
4 module wide bar : 4 module wide space. For
example, enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:
2 module wide bar
2 module wide space
4 module wide bar
4 module wide space
6 module wide bar
6 module wide space
8 module wide bar
8 module wide space

199

Chapter

Barcodes

The barcode data. In the automatic mode,
whenever a string of 4 or more contiguous numeric
digits are detected, VGL inserts a subset C
command at the start of the numeric string. When
the string of numeric digits is broken, VGL inserts a
subset B command. Code 128 encodes from 1
through 40 characters from the character set of the
subset code selected. Use the appropriate subset
code from the Code 128 Character Set in Table 32.
When data is provided in the manual mode, the
readable data field is not printed.

(cc)G

200

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

Code 128

Table 32. Code 128 Character Set

Subset Subset
B
C

Subset
B

Subset
C

V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
__
NUL
SOH
STX
ETX
EOT
ENQ
ACK
BEL

V
W
X
Y
Z
[
\
]
^
__
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71

>SP
>!
>"
>#
>$
>%
>&
>'

72
73
74
75
76
77

BS
HT
LF
VT
FF
CR

h
i
j
k
l
m

72
73
74
75
76
77

>(
>)
>*
>+
>,
>-

24
25
26
27
28
29

78
79
80
81
82
83

SO
SI
DLE
DC1
DC2
DC3

n
o
p
q
r
s

78
79
80
81
82
83

>.
>/

>
?
@
A
B
C

30
31
32
33
34
35

84
85
86
87
88
89

DC4
NAK
SYN
ETB
CAN
EM

t
u
v
w
x
y

84
85
86
87
88
89

D
E
F
G
H
I

36
37
38
39
40
41

90
91
92
93
94
95

SUB
ESC
FS
GS
RS
US

z
{
:
}
~
DEL

90
91
92
93
94
95

42
43
44
45
46
47

J
K
L
M
N
O

42
43
44
45
46
47

96
97
98
99
100
101

FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODE C
CODE B
FNC4

FNC3
FNC2
SHIFT
CODE C
FNC4
CODE A

96
97
98
99
CODE B
CODE A

>2
>3
>4
>5
>6
>7

48
49
50
51
52
53

P
Q
R
S
T
U

48
49
50
51
52
53

102

FNC1

Value

Subset
A

0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

SP
!
"
#
$
%
&
'
(
)
*
+
'
.
/
0
1

00
01
02
03
04
05
06
07
08
09
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71

18
19
20
21
22
23

2
3
4
5
6
7

18
19
20
21
22
23

24
25
26
27
28
29

8
9
:
;
<
=

30
31
32
33
34
35

>
?
@
A
B
C

36
37
38
39
40
41

Value

Subset
A

Alternate

START CODE A*
103
START CODE B*
104
START CODE C*
105
*Used at the beginning of manual mode commands.

>7
>6
>5

201

Chapter

Barcodes

Code 128 Examples
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Code 128
barcode below in the automatic mode. In the command sequence, graphics
mode data is italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a
detailed description of alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BNZABC123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

code128.ex1

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
N deselected printing the optional readable data field.
Letter Z selected Code 128.
ABC123456 is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the Code 128 barcode below in the
automatic mode using standard 10 cpi font, double the default ratio, and data
of ABC123456. The barcode data begins in subset B and automatically
switches to subset C for the numeric data.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BY9Z22446688ABC123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

202

Code 128

The command below generates the following vertical Code 128 barcode with
data of 123@25% in manual mode, subset A.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CNZ>7123@25%^G^KF^-^PN^-

code128.ex

The command below generates the same vertical Code 128 barcode in the
automatic mode, subset B. Because less than 4 consecutive numeric digits
were provided in the data, no subset switching occurred, and the barcode
remained in subset B.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CNZ123@25%^G^KF^-^PN^-

code128.ex

203

Chapter

Barcodes

EAN 8
The EAN 8 barcode is related to the Universal Product Code (UPC) group.
EAN 8 can be printed with or without a 2- or 5-digit add-on data field, which is
placed at the end of the barcode. The EAN 8 (European Article Number)
barcode structure is shown in Figure 10 and described on the following
pages.

HEIGHT

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

LEFT
DATA
FIELD
OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

CENTER
CODE

RIGHT
DATA
FIELD
CHECK
DIGIT
FIELD
STOP
CODE
STARTING
POSITION
QUIET
ZONE

START CODE

CENTER CODE

LEFT DATA
FIELD

RIGHT DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL READABLE
DATA FIELD

STOP CODE

QUIET
ZONE

QUIET
ZONE
2- or 5DIGIT
ADD-ON
CODE

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

Figure 10. EAN 8 Structure

204

HEIGHT
52- or
DIGIT
N
-O
ADD E
CO D

EAN 8

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the barcode structure have blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
should be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from
overlapping. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on the form for
the quiet zones. A trailing quiet zone is provided automatically if an add-on
code has been specified in the barcode command.

Start/Center/Stop Codes
The Start/Center/Stop codes are special character codes marking those
portions of the barcode. These codes are automatically produced with each
barcode.

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent a limited numeric character set (numbers 0-9 and Special
Characters Start, Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from 1
through 4 modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and 2 spaces that total
7 modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right
data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol,
and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the
barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate
scanning.

EAN 8 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

205

Chapter

Barcodes

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 33 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

Table 33. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None
9 or :

type

206

Represents the barcode type. Enter U for standard
EAN 8; enter o (alpha o) for EAN 8 plus a 2-digit
add-on data field; enter p for EAN 8 plus a 5-digit
add-on data field.

EAN 8

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. However, unique variable
ratios for EAN 8 barcodes easily generate large,
out-of-spec barcodes. Ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F; VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.
EAN 8 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios
are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size
of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following
pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :
2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3
module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module
wide bar : 4 module wide space.

The barcode data. Standard EAN 8 barcodes
encode exactly 7 digits. The first four data
characters are in the left half of the data field, and
the last 3 characters are in the right half of the data
field. (A check digit is automatically computed and
printed at the end of the right data field). If the 2- or
5-digit add-on data field is used, include this data at
the end of the data field.
The characters available for the data field are 0
through 9 (hex 30 through 39, respectively).

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration followed by any valid
command character or G, the universal sequence
terminator.

207

Chapter

Barcodes

EAN 8 Examples
The following command generated the horizontal default ratio EAN 8 barcode
below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYU2244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

ean8.ex1
^PY^- turned on the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.
Letter U selected the EAN 8 barcode type.
2244595 is the 7-digit barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

The following command generated the vertical EAN 8 barcode below using
standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 2244595:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^CYU2244595^G^PN^-

ean8.ex2

208

EAN 13

EAN 13
The EAN 13 barcode is related to the Universal Product Code (UPC) group.
EAN 13 can be printed with or without a 2- or 5-digit add-on data field, which
is placed at the end of the barcode. The EAN 13 (European Article Number)
barcode structure is shown in Figure 11 and described on the following
pages.

HEIGHT
STARTING
POSITION
NUMBER
SYSTEM
CHARACTER

N
QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

LEFT
DATA
FIELD
OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

CENTER
CODE

RIGHT
DATA
FIELD

STARTING
POSITION
START CODE

CENTER CODE

CHECK
DIGIT
FIELD

STOP
CODE
STOP CODE
ZONE
QUIET

QUIET
ZONE

LEFT DATA
FIELD

RIGHT DATA
FIELD

QUIET
ZONE

NUMBER
SYSTEM
CHARACTER

OPTIONAL READABLE
DATA FIELD

2- or 5DIGIT
ADD-ON
CODE

HEIGHT
2- or 5DIGIT
ADD-ON
CODE

CHECK DIGIT FIELD

Figure 11. EAN 13 Structure

Quiet Zone
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the code to begin
and end in a blank area. You are responsible for providing sufficient space on
the form for the quiet zones. A trailing quiet zone is provided automatically if
an add-on code has been specified in the barcode command.

Start/Center/Stop Codes
The Start/Center/Stop codes are special character codes marking those
portions of the barcode. These codes are automatically produced with each
barcode.

209

Chapter

Barcodes

Number System Character
The number system character field allows you to apply a code to a class or
type of item. The first character in the data field is used as the number system
character; it is printed in the left quiet zone.

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of varying width bars and spaces to
represent a limited character set (numbers 0-9 and Special Characters Start,
Center, and Stop). The bars and spaces vary in width from 1 through 4
modules. Each character consists of 2 bars and two spaces that total 7
modules. The symbol coding of the left data field is different from the right
data field to permit read direction sensing.

Readable Data
The human readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. Barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol
and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the
barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate
scanning. The number system character is included in the check digit
algorithm.

EAN 13 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 34 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

210

EAN 13

Table 34. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None
9 or :

type

Represents the barcode type. Enter T for standard
EAN 13; enter m for EAN 13 plus a 2-digit add-on
data field; enter n for EAN 13 plus a 5-digit add-on
data field.

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. However, unique variable
ratios for EAN 13 barcodes easily generate large,
out-of-spec barcodes. Ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F; VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.
EAN 13 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The ratios
are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size
of each bar or space, in dot width, in the following
pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module wide space :
2 module wide bar : 2 module wide space : 3
module wide bar : 3 module wide space : 4 module
wide bar : 4 module wide space.

211

Chapter

Barcodes

The barcode data. EAN 13 barcodes encode
exactly 12 digits. The first character input is
interpreted as the number system character. (A
barcode character is not produced for the number
system character.) The next six characters are the
left side (the upper side on vertically oriented
symbols). The final five characters are the right side
(or the lower side on vertically oriented symbols). A
thirteenth character is an automatic check digit
which is computed and printed in the last character
position in the right data field. If the 2- or 5-digit
add-on data field is used, include this data at the
end of the data field. The characters available for
the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

EAN 13 Examples
The following command generated the horizontal default ratio EAN 13
barcode below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized,
and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYT123456123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

212

EAN 13

^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the vertical EAN 13 barcode below using
standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of
123456123456:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYT123456123456^G^KF^-^PN^-

ean13.ex2

213

Chapter

Barcodes

German Interleaved 2/5
The German Interleaved 2/5 barcode structure is shown in Figure 12 and
described on the following pages.

HEIGHT

STARTING
POSITION

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT

STARTING
POSITION

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

STOP
CODE

LOWER
GUARD
BAND

QUIET
ZONE
QUIET START
ZONE CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 12. German Interleaved 2/5 Structure

Start/Stop Codes
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop
codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

214

German Interleaved 2/5

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. Bbarcodearcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode
symbol and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is
provided when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit
The modulo-10 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the
barcode symbol. The check digit provides the means to verify accurate
scanning.

German Interleaved 2/5 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 35 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

Table 35. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

215

Chapter

Barcodes

9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

type

Represents the barcode type. Select one of the
German Interleaved 2/5 barcode type codes shown
in Table 36.

Table 36. German Interleaved 2/5 Barcodes
Check
Digits

Default Bar/
Space
Ratios*

Standard
Type Code

IBARC,
Type Code

# of Data
Characters

POSTAGI**

Mod 10

4:6:14:16

POSTAGL

Mod 10

4:6:14:16

*Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:
Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.
**The last character of this type command is the uppercase “i” character
(hex 49), not to be confused with a lowercase “L” character (hex 6C).
ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F. VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.
German Interleaved 2/5 barcodes use four-digit
ratios. The ratios are interpreted from left to right,
measuring the size of each bar or space, in dot
width, in the following pattern: narrow bar : narrow
space : wide bar : wide space. For example, enter
2266 in the ratio parameter for:
2 dot-wide narrow bar
2 dot-wide narrow space
6 dot-wide wide bar
6 dot-wide wide space

216

German Interleaved 2/5

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. German Interleaved 2/5
encodes either 11 or 13 characters. The characters
available for the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30
through 39).

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

German Interleaved 2/5 Examples
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio German
Interleaved 2/5 barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics
mode data is italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a
detailed description of alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BTV01853624568^G^KF^-^PN^-

217

Chapter

Barcodes

^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the 11-digit horizontal German Interleaved
2/5 barcode below using standard font, the default ratio, and data of
10518475232:
^PY^-^M05,05,000^KF^IBARC,POSTAGI,B,10518475232^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generated the 13-digit vertical German Interleaved
2/5 barcode below using the .1-inch OCR-B font, the default ratio, and data of
2846586755694:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CTW2846586755694^G^KF^-^PN^-

218

GS1-128

GS1-128
NOTE: GS1-128 is formerly known as UCC/EAN-128.
The UCC/EAN-128 structure is shown in Figure 13 and described on the
following pages.

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

CHECK
DIGIT
FIELD

CHECK DIGIT
FIELD

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE

START
CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

LOWER
GUARD
BAND

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 13. UCC/EAN-128 Structure
UCC/EAN-128 uses the same barcode and character set as Code 128.
However, in UCC/EAN-128, the Function 1 character FNC1 immediately
follows the start code. The FNC1 character has been reserved exclusively for
UCC/EAN-128.
The UCC/EAN-128 data structure requires an Application Identifier (AI) at the
beginning of barcode data. Each AI determines the format and length of the
data which follows. See Table 37 for more detail.

219

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 37. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers
Application
Identifier (AI)

Format

Serial Shipping Container Code

n2+n18

Item Num. of Goods Within Another Unit

n2+n14

Batch or Lot Number

n2+an..20

11 (*)

Production Date (YYMMDD)

n2+n6

13 (*)

Packaging Date (YYMMDD)

n2+n6

15 (*)

Sell By Date (Quality) (YYMMDD)

n2+n6

17 (*)

Expiration Date (Safety) (YYMMDD)

n2+n6

Product Variant

n2+n2

Serial Number

n2+an..20

HIBCC = Quantity, Date, Batch and Link

n2+an..29

Lot Number (Transitional Use)

n3+n..19

240

Additional Product ID Assigned By Manufacturer

n3+an..30

250

Secondary Serial Number

n3+an..30

Quantity

n2+n..8

310 (***)

Net Weight, Kilograms

n4+n6

311 (***)

Length or 1st Dimension, Meters

n4+n6

312 (***)

Width, Diameter or 2nd Dimension, Meters

n4+n6

313 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters

n4+n6

314 (***)

Area, Square Meters

n4+n6

315 (***)

Volume, Liters

n4+n6

316 (***)

Volume, Cubic Meters

n4+n6

320 (***)

Net Weight, Pounds

n4+n6

321 (***)

Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches

n4+n6

322 (***)

Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet

n4+n6

323 (***)

Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards

n4+n6

324 (***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches

n4+n6

325 (***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet

n4+n6

326 (***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards

n4+n6

327 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Inches

n4+n6

328 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Feet

n4+n6

329 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height, or 3rd Dimension, Yards

n4+n6

330 (***)

Gross Weight-Kilograms

n4+n6

331 (***)

Length or 1st Dimension, Logistics

n4+n6

332(***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Meters, Logistics

n4+n6

333 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Meters, Logistics

n4+n6

23 (**)

220

Content

GS1-128

Table 37. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)
Application
Identifier (AI)

Content

Format

334 (***)

Area, Square Meters, Logistics

n4+n6

335 (***)

Gross Volume, Liters

n4+n6

336 (***)

Gross Volume, Cubic Meters

n4+n6

337 (***)

Kilograms Per Square Meter

n4+n6

340 (***)

Gross Weight, Pounds

n4+n6

341 (***)

Length Or 1st Dimension, Inches, Logistics

n4+n6

342 (***)

Length Or 1st Dimension, Feet, Logistics

n4+n6

343 (***)

Length Or 1st Dimension, Yards, Logistics

n4+n6

344 (***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Inches, Logistics

n4+n6

345 (***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Feet, Logistics

n4+n6

346 (***)

Width, Diameter, or 2nd Dimension, Yards, Logistics

n4+n6

347 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Inches, Logistics

n4+n6

348 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Feet, Logistics

n4+n6

349 (***)

Depth, Thickness, Height or 3rd Dimension, Yards, Logistics

n4+n6

350 (***)

Area, Square Inches

n4+n6

351 (***)

Area, Square Feet

n4+n6

352 (***)

Area, Square Yards

n4+n6

353 (***)

Area, Square Inches, Logistics

n4+n6

354 (***)

Area, Square Feet, Logistics

n4+n6

355 (***)

Area, Square Yards, Logistics

n4+n6

356 (***)

Net Weight, Troy Ounce

n4+n6

357 (***)

Net Volume, Ounces

n4+n6

360 (***)

Volume, Quarts

n4+n6

361 (***)

Volume, Gallons

n4+n6

362 (***)

Gross Volume, Quarts

n4+n6

363 (***)

Gross Volume, Gallons

n4+n6

364 (***)

Volume, Cubic Inches

n4+n6

365 (***)

Volume, Cubic Feet

n4+n6

366 (***)

Volume, Cubic Yards

n4+n6

367 (***)

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

n4+n6

368 (***)

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

n4+n6

369 (***)

Gross Volume, Cubic Inches

n4+n6

Quantity of Units Contained (For Use With AI 02 Only)

n2+n..8

400

Customer's Purchase Order Number

n3+an..30

401

Consignment Number

n3+an..30

410

Ship To (Deliver To) Location Code Using EAN-13

n3+n13

221

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 37. UCC/EAN-128 Application Identifiers (continued)
Application
Identifier (AI)

Content

411

Bill To (Invoice To) Location Code Using EAN-13

n3+n13

412

Purchase From (Location Code of Party From Whom Goods Are
Purchased)

n3+n13

413

Ship For UCC/EAN Location Code

n3+n13

414

EAN Location Code For Physical Identification

n3+n13

420

Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code Within a Single Postal Authority

n3+an..20

421

Ship To (Deliver To) Postal Code With 3-Digit ISO Country Code Prefix

n3+n3+an..9

8001

Roll Products-Width, Length, Core Diameter, Direction and Splices

n4+n14

8003

UPC/EAN Number and Serial Number Or Returnable Asset

n4+n14+an..16

8004

UCC/EAN Serial Identification

n4+an..30

8005

Identifies the Price Per Unit of Measure

n4+n6

8006

Component of an Article

n4+n14+n2+n2

8018

Service Relation Number

n4+n18

8100

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character and Offer

n4+n1+n5

8101

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character, Offer and End of Offer

n4+n1+n5+n4

8102

Coupon Extended Code-Number System Character Preceded by Zero

n4+n1+n1

Mutually Agreed, Between Trading Partners

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

n2+an..30

Internal-Carriers

n2+an..30

Internal-Carriers

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

n2+an..30

Intra-Company (Internal)

n2+an..30

Internal

n2+an..30

(*)To indicate only year and month, DD must be filled with “00”
(**) Plus one digit for length indication
(***) Plus one digit for decimal point indication
Data Value Representation:
a - alphabetic characters
an - alpha-numeric characters
an..3 - up to 3 alpha-numeric characters

222

Format

n - numeric characters
n3 - 3 numeric characters, fixed length
n..3 - up to 3 numeric characters

GS1-128

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from
overlapping. You must provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start and stop codes identify the leading and trailing ends of the barcode.
UCC/EAN-128 uses unique start codes for character subsets B and C, and a
stop code common to both. An automatic mode switching feature is used to
generate the correct start code based on the first four data field characters.

Data Field
UCC/EAN-128 barcodes require a special character called “Function 1”
(FNC1) to immediately follow the start code. VGL automatically supplies this
character, so it must not be included in the data field by the user.
A character is made up of three bars and three spaces, each varying in width
from 1 through 4 modules, for a total of eleven modules. The number of
modules making up the bars is even. The stop code has four bars and is 13
modules wide.
The character set for UCC/EAN-128 is the same as the character set for Code
128. Refer to the Code 128 Character Set (Table 32). Every character is
interpreted according to the currently active character subset. UCC/EAN-128
uses subset B and subset C only. Subset B, shown in Table 32, includes all
standard alphanumeric keyboard characters, lowercase alphabetical
characters, and special characters. Subset C interprets the characters as
pairs of numbers 00 through 99, along with some special characters, as
shown in Table 32. The start code or subset switch code determines whether
a particular barcode character is decoded as one character or as a pair of
numbers.

Readable Data
The optional printed data field (PDF) provides a human-readable
interpretation of the barcode data. When the printed data field is enabled by
use of the “PDF” parameter, the overall height of the bars is reduced to make
room for a guard band and the human-readable characters. The printed data
field is formatted with spaces or parentheses denoting particular data fields
such as the application identifier. Special characters such as start, stop,
subset switch, modulo-103 check digit, and FNC1 do not appear in the
human-readable data.
Refer to Figure 13. Using Level I syntax ^B (horizontal) or ^C (vertical
clockwise rotation), the readable data appears below the barcode, reading in
the direction of start code towards stop code. Using Level II syntax (^IBARC),
the barcode may be oriented with any of the graphics commands ^M, ^V, ^U,
or ^E; and the human-readable data may be positioned above or below the
bars, still reading in the direction of start code towards stop code.

223

Chapter

Barcodes

Modulo-103 Check Digit
A modulo-103 check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the
barcode symbol immediately in front of the stop code, in the same manner as
the Code 128 barcode. The check digit verifies accurate scanning. The start
code is included in the check digit algorithm. The modulo-103 check digit is
not displayed in the readable data field.

Modulo-10 Data Field Check Digit for SSCC-18 and SCC-14
AI 00 (called the Serial Shipping Container Code, or SSCC-18) takes
eighteen additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10
check digit on the preceding seventeen data bytes. Counting the two zeros of
the application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the twentieth byte in the
data field.
AI 01 (called the Shipping Container Code, or SCC-14) takes fourteen
additional numerical data bytes. The last data byte is a modulo-10 check digit
on the preceding thirteen data bytes. Counting the zero and the one of the
application identifier, the modulo-10 check digit is the sixteenth byte in the
data field.
The modulo-10 data field check digit for both SSCC-18 and SCC-14 is printed
in the barcode as the second half of the last number pair using subset C. It is
displayed in the human-readable data field as the twentieth byte for SSCC-18
or the sixteenth byte for SCC-14.
VGL automatically calculates the modulo-10 check digit for SSCC-18 if only
17 data digits are provided following the application identifier of 00.

UCC/EAN-128 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p q data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] q [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 38 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

224

GS1-128

Table 38. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None
9 or :

The type code for UCC/EAN-128. Enter q.

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F; VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.
UCC/EAN-128 barcodes use eight-digit ratios. The
ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring
the size of each bar or space in dot width, in the
following pattern: 1 module wide bar : 1 module
wide space : 2 module wide bar : 2 module wide
space : 3 module wide bar : 3 module wide space :
4 module wide bar : 4 module wide space. For
example, enter 22446688 in the ratio data field for:
2 module wide bar
2 module wide space
4 module wide bar
4 module wide space
6 module wide bar
6 module wide space
8 module wide bar
8 module wide space

225

Chapter

Barcodes

The barcode data. In the automatic mode,
whenever a string of 4 or more contiguous numeric
digits are detected, VGL inserts a subset C
command at the start of the numeric string. When
the string of numeric digits is broken, VGL inserts a
subset B command. Code 128 encodes from 1
through 40 characters from the character set of the
subset code selected. UCC/EAN-128 must have
exactly 19 digits. Use the appropriate subset code
from the Code 128 Character Set in Table 32.
When data is provided in the manual mode,
readable data field is not printed.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

UCC/EAN-128 Examples
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio UCC/EAN-128
barcode below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized
and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^- ^M10,10,000^BYq0034567890123456789^G^-^PN^-

226

GS1-128

The following command generated the UCC/EAN-128 barcode below using
variable target dot ratio and data of 0034567890123456789.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^IBARC,UCC128,RD2:4:5:7:8:10:11:13,N,
0034567890123456789^G^-^PN^-

The command below generates the following vertical UCC/EAN-128 barcode
with data of 0034567890123456789.
^PY^-^V05,05,300^IBARC,UCC128,B,0034567890123456789^G-^PN^-

The command below generates the same vertical UCC/EAN-128 barcode
using target dot variable ratios with the Version I syntax.
^PY^-^M10,10,300^CN:q24578ABD0034567890123456789^G-^PN^-

227

Chapter

Barcodes

UCC 128.ex4

The program below illustrates the use of dynamic forms to generate part of a
shipping form with three UCC/EAN-128 barcodes. An internal code (AI = 91)
is used as a store number, a ship-to-postal (AI = 420) gives the customer ZIP
Code as dynamic data, and a serial shipping container code (AI = 00) is also
given as dynamic data. In this example, since the application identifiers are
known, they are given as static data, and only the data field for each variable
AI is made dynamic. The ship-to-postal takes a five digit ZIP Code; the SSCC18 takes seventeen digits with VGL creating the modulo-10 data field check
digit automatically.
^PY^-^F^^B^^M0101000
^X titles using compressed print ^A
^T0010^J000^S4SHIP TO POSTAL CODE
^T0010^J170^S4STORE
^T0010^J340^S4SSCC-18
^X EAN/UCC 128 barcodes ^A
^M0808^T0030^J020^KF^BYq420^[005^G^KF
^M0808^T0030^J190^KF^BYq911528^G^KF
^M1208^T0030^J360^KF^BYq00^[017^G^KF
^^,^^]
92614
34567890123456789
^G^^,^^O^-^PN^-

228

GS1-128

229

Chapter

Barcodes

GS-1 Data Matrix
NOTE: GS-1 Datamatrix is formerly known as Datamatrix.
Data Matrix is a two-dimensional barcode containing small dark and light
square data modules. It has a finder pattern of two solid lines and two
alternating dark and light lines on its perimeter. This barcode is capable of
storing up to 3116 numeric digits or 2335 alphanumeric characters in a
symbol 144 modules square. It is also capable of encoding in a number of
different schemes.
Two main subsets for Data Matrix exist, which differ in terms of error
correction. The first subset uses ECC-000 through ECC-140 and uses
convolution coding for error correction. The second subset is ECC-200, which
uses Reed-Solomon error correction techniques. ECC-200 format is
recommended.

Quiet Zone
The minimum quiet zone is one module width on all four sides.

Readable Data
There is no printable data field allowed for the Data Matrix barcode.

Data Field
The data allowed within the data field depends on the error correction subset
you are using. See the data description on page 231 for details.

Data Matrix Command Format
Default Ratio:

230

(cc) dir N M [X[D]n] [Cn] [Rn] [En] [In], data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Enter N to turn off the readable data field.

The Data Matrix type code. Enter M.

X[D]n

Optional parameter which designates the xdimension width of a single square data module in
dots (60 x 72 dpi), or printer dots if the D parameter
is used. For n, enter a value from 1 through 255 to
represent the dot number.

Optional parameter that sets the number of
columns in the symbol. A value of 0 (the default)
automates this process. See Table 42 through
Table 48 for the combination of columns and rows
allowed and the maximum amount of data that can
be encoded.

GS-1 Data Matrix

Optional parameter that specifies the number of
rows in the symbol. A value of 0 (the default)
automates this process. See Table 42 through
Table 48 for the combination of columns and rows
allowed and the maximum amount of data that can
be encoded.

Optional parameter that specifies the error
correction level. Enter E, then one of the following
values: 0, 50, 80, 100, 140, or 200. Levels 0
through 140 use increasing levels of convolutional
error coding. Level 200 (the default) uses ReedSolomon block error correction and is the
recommended level of error correction.

Optional parameter that specifies the format ID.
This field only has meaning for ECC-000 through
ECC-140 and is ignored for ECC-200. This
specifies the type of data that is encoded in the
symbol. Enter I, then a value from 1 through 6. The
default value is 3. Table 39 shows the type of data
encoded for the various format IDs.

Enter a comma (,) to separate the data field from
the previous field. The comma is required.

data

For ECC-000 through ECC-140, the data allowed
within the data field depends on the format ID
parameter. The allowed data for these ECC types
are given in Table 39. For Format ID #5 which
accepts control characters and Format ID #6 which
accepts codes greater than 127, you can enter
these values using a SO character followed by an
identifier. When encoding special characters, you
must enter a SO character followed by at least one
other identifier and its field (i.e., ASCII 254 =
^d254). This is only considered to be one
character, even though the data field holds 5
characters (^d254). If you intend to code the SO
character by itself (no special encoding), then the
SO character should be followed by another SO
character. Table 40 illustrates how to use these
special characters.

231

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 39. Data Field for ECC-000 through ECC-140
Format ID #

Data

Numeric 0-9, Space

Uppercase A-Z, Space

Uppercase A-Z, Numeric 0-9, Space

Uppercase A-Z, Numeric 0-9, Space, Period, Comma,
Minus, Forward Slash

Full 128 ASCII set (0-127)

User defined (0-255)
For ECC-200, format ID has no meaning and is
ignored. Instead, you can enter data of any type
(ASCII 0-255) and it will be automatically optimized
into the proper encoding scheme. See the “Special
Characters Using SO” section for examples of
methods to enter special characters such as FNC1
into the data stream.
The maximum number of data depend on three
factors: (1) size of the matrix, (2) ECC level, and (3)
type of data. The size of the matrix is automatically
chosen by VGL unless the parameters of row and/
or column are supplied (see Cn and Rn
parameters). The maximum number of data can
then be found by finding the proper table based on
ECC type. For each different valid matrix
combination, the maximum number of data are
given for numeric, alphanumeric, and full 8-byte
data. You do not have to enter the maximum; a pad
character is automatically inserted into the barcode
when necessary.
(cc)G

232

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration followed by any valid
command character or G, the universal sequence
terminator.

GS-1 Data Matrix

Special Characters Using SO
Table 40 and Table 41 illustrate the methods of encoding special characters,
and shows the special characters supported. These special characters are
identified by using SO. The default value for the SO character is hex 0E, but
this value can be changed using the printer's front panel (see User's Manual
for details). Examples are given with the SO character represented by “^” for
clarity.

Table 40. Special Character Encoding (All ECC Levels)
Special Characters

Method

Example

Control Characters 0-31

+ @ ... + _

NUL = ^@, BEL = ^G

Any ASCII value 0 - 255

+ d + 3 digit

ASCII 10 = ^d010

ASCII value SO

Table 41. Special Character Encoding (ECC-200 Only)
Special Characters

Method

Example

FNC1

+ 1. If FNC1 is 2nd
codeword, previous data must be
A-Z, a-z, or 01-99

01^1

Structured Append

+ 2 + 3 digit number
representing symbol sequence
and file identifier

^2042

Reader Programming

+ 3
Must be first in the data field

MH10.8.3 Abbreviated
Format 05 Header

+ 5
Must be first in the data field

MH10.8.3 Abbreviated
Format 06 Header

+ 6
Must be first in the data field

Extended Channel
Interpretation

+ 7 + 6 digit EC
(000000-999999)

^7112233

233

Chapter

Barcodes

Symbol Characteristics
The following tables illustrate the maximum data capacities for the Data
Matrix barcode as a function of symbol size (column x row) and data type.
Note that all ECC-000 through ECC-140 symbols are square and always have
an odd number of rows and columns. ECC-200 symbols have square or
rectangular sizes and have an even number of rows and columns.

Table 42. ECC-000 Characteristics
(Row x Column)
9X9
11 X 11
13 X 13
15 X 15
17 X 17
19 X 19
21 X 21
23 X 23
25 X 25
27 X 27
29 X 29
31 X 31
33 X 33
35 X 35
37 X 37
39 X 39
41 X 41
43 X 43
45 X 45
47 X 47
49 X 49

234

Maximum
Numeric
3 characters
12 characters
24 characters
37 characters
53 characters
72 characters
92 characters
115 characters
140 characters
168 characters
197 characters
229 characters
264 characters
300 characters
339 characters
380 characters
424 characters
469 characters
500 characters
560 characters
596 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
2 characters
8 characters
16 characters
25 characters
35 characters
48 characters
61 characters
76 characters
93 characters
112 characters
131 characters
153 characters
176 characters
200 characters
226 characters
253 characters
282 characters
313 characters
345 characters
378 characters
413 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
1 character
5 characters
10 characters
16 characters
23 characters
31 characters
40 characters
50 characters
61 characters
73 characters
86 characters
100 characters
115 characters
131 characters
148 characters
166 characters
185 characters
205 characters
226 characters
248 characters
271 characters

GS-1 Data Matrix

Table 43. ECC-050 Characteristics
(Row x Column)
11 X 11
13 X 13
15 X 15
17 X 17
19 X 19
21 X 21
23 X 23
25 X 25
27 X 27
29 X 29
31 X 31
33 X 33
35 X 35
37 X 37
39 X 39
41 X 41
43 X 43
45 X 45
47 X 47
49 X 49

Maximum
Numeric
1 character
10 characters
20 characters
32 characters
46 characters
61 characters
78 characters
97 characters
118 characters
140 characters
164 characters
190 characters
217 characters
246 characters
277 characters
310 characters
344 characters
380 characters
418 characters
457 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
1 character
6 characters
13 characters
21 characters
30 characters
41 characters
52 characters
65 characters
78 characters
93 characters
109 characters
126 characters
145 characters
164 characters
185 characters
206 characters
229 characters
253 characters
278 characters
305 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
not supported
4 characters
9 characters
14 characters
20 characters
27 characters
34 characters
42 characters
51 characters
61 characters
72 characters
83 characters
95 characters
108 characters
121 characters
135 characters
150 characters
166 characters
183 characters
200 characters

Table 44. ECC-080 Characteristics
(Row x Column)
13 X 13
15 X 15
17 X 17
19 X 19
21 X 21
23 X 23
25 X 25
27 X 27
29 X 29
31 X 31
33 X 33
35 X 35
37 X 37
39 X 39
41 X 41
43 X 43
45 X 45
47 X 47
49 X 49

Maximum
Numeric
4 characters
13 characters
24 characters
36 characters
50 characters
65 characters
82 characters
100 characters
120 characters
141 characters
164 characters
188 characters
214 characters
242 characters
270 characters
301 characters
333 characters
366 characters
402 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
3 characters
9 characters
16 characters
24 characters
33 characters
43 characters
54 characters
67 characters
80 characters
94 characters
109 characters
125 characters
143 characters
161 characters
180 characters
201 characters
222 characters
244 characters
268 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
2 characters
6 characters
10 characters
16 characters
22 characters
28 characters
36 characters
44 characters
52 characters
62 characters
72 characters
82 characters
94 characters
106 characters
118 characters
132 characters
146 characters
160 characters
176 characters

235

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 45. ECC-100 Characteristics
(Row x Column)
13 X 13
15 X 15
17 X 17
19 X 19
21 X 21
23 X 23
25 X 25
27 X 27
29 X 29
31 X 31
33 X 33
35 X 35
37 X 37
39 X 39
41 X 41
43 X 43
45 X 45
47 X 47
49 X 49

Maximum
Numeric
1 character
8 characters
16 characters
25 characters
36 characters
47 characters
60 characters
73 characters
88 characters
104 characters
121 characters
140 characters
159 characters
180 characters
201 characters
224 characters
248 characters
273 characters
300 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
1 character
5 characters
11 characters
17 characters
24 characters
31 characters
40 characters
49 characters
59 characters
69 characters
81 characters
93 characters
106 characters
120 characters
134 characters
149 characters
165 characters
182 characters
200 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
not supported
3 characters
7 characters
11 characters
15 characters
20 characters
26 characters
32 characters
38 characters
62 characters
53 characters
61 characters
69 characters
78 characters
88 characters
98 characters
108 characters
119 characters
131 characters

Table 46. ECC-140 Characteristics
(Row x Column)
17 X 17
19 X 19
21 X 21
23 X 23
25 X 25
27 X 27
29 X 29
31 X 31
33 X 33
35 X 35
37 X 37
39 X 39
41 X 41
43 X 43
45 X 45
47 X 47
49 X 49

236

Maximum
Numeric
2 characters
6 characters
12 characters
17 characters
24 characters
30 characters
38 characters
46 characters
54 characters
64 characters
73 characters
84 characters
94 characters
106 characters
118 characters
130 characters
144 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
1 character
4 characters
8 characters
11 characters
16 characters
20 characters
25 characters
30 characters
36 characters
42 characters
49 characters
56 characters
63 characters
70 characters
78 characters
87 characters
96 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
1 character
3 characters
5 characters
7 characters
10 characters
13 characters
16 characters
20 characters
24 characters
28 characters
32 characters
36 characters
41 characters
46 characters
51 characters
57 characters
63 characters

GS-1 Data Matrix

Table 47. ECC-200 Square Characteristics
(Row x Column)
10 X 10
12 X 12
14 X 14
16 X 16
18 X 18
20 X 20
22 X 22
24 X 24
26 X 26
32 X 32
36 X 36
40 X 40
44 X 44
48 X 48
52 X 52
64 X 64
72 X 72
80 X 80
88 X 88
96 X 96
104 X 104
120 X 120
132 X 132
144 X 144

Maximum
Numeric
6 characters
10 characters
16 characters
24 characters
36 characters
44 characters
60 characters
72 characters
88 characters
124 characters
172 characters
228 characters
288 characters
348 characters
408 characters
560 characters
736 characters
912 characters
1152 characters
1392 characters
1632 characters
2100 characters
2608 characters
3116 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
3 characters
6 characters
10 characters
16 characters
25 characters
31 characters
43 characters
52 characters
64 characters
91 characters
127 characters
169 characters
214 characters
259 characters
304 characters
418 characters
550 characters
682 characters
862 characters
1042 characters
1222 characters
1573 characters
1954 characters
2335 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
1 character
3 characters
6 characters
10 characters
16 characters
20 characters
28 characters
34 characters
42 characters
60 characters
84 characters
112 characters
142 characters
172 characters
202 characters
278 characters
366 characters
454 characters
574 characters
694 characters
814 characters
1048 characters
1302 characters
1556 characters

Table 48. ECC-200 Rectangular Characteristics
(Row x Column)
8 X 18
8 X 32
12 X 26
12 X 36
16 X 36
16 X 48

Maximum
Numeric
10 characters
20 characters
32 characters
44 characters
64 characters
98 characters

Maximum
Alphanumeric
6 characters
13 characters
22 characters
31 characters
46 characters
72 characters

Maximum 8-Byte
Data
3 characters
8 characters
14 characters
20 characters
30 characters
47 characters

237

Chapter

Barcodes

Data Matrix Example
The following commands generated the Data Matrix barcodes shown below.
In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized, and barcode
data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of alphanumeric
commands.
^PY^-^M01,01,010^KF^BNMXD8C36R12E200I5,0123456789^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 0.1 inches and character width was
selected at 0.1 inches.
A 0.1 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
N deselected printing the readable data field.
Letter M selected the Data Matrix barcode.
XD8 designates the x-dimension width of a single square module as 8 printer
dots.
C36 sets the number of columns in the symbol at 36.
R12 sets the number of rows in the symbol at 12.
E200 sets the error correction level at ECC-200.
I5 set the format ID. This value is ignored with the ECC-200 error correction
level set.
, (comma) separates the previous information from the data field.
0123456789 is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
^PY^-^M01,01,010^KF^BNM,0123456789^G^KF^-^PN^-

^M0101010^KF^IBARC,DATAMATRIX,XD8,C36,R12,E140,I5,N,A1B2C3D4E5F
6G7H8I9J0K12^G^KF^-

238

Identicon

Identicon
The Identicon barcode structure is shown in Figure 14 and described on
following pages.

HEIGHT

STARTING
POSITION

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET START
ZONE CODE

LOWER
GUARD
BAND

DATA FIELD

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

DATA
FIELD

STOP
CODE
QUIET
ZONE

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 14. Identicon Structure

Quiet Zone
Quiet zones extend on both ends of the barcode to permit the scan to begin
and end in a blank area. The quiet zone should be at least 0.25 inch wide and
completely blank.

Start/Stop Codes
The Start/Stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode. The
Start/Stop code is automatically produced with each barcode.

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars to represent the
10 numeric characters (0 - 9) and Start/Stop codes. All the information is
contained in the width of the bars, the spaces serving only to separate the
individual bars. The wide bars are conventionally three times the widths of the
narrow bars. The spaces may be any reasonable width but are typically equal
to the narrow bars. The barcode can encode up to 40 numbers. Each data
character is represented by 5 bars separated by spaces. There must be two
wide bars among the 5 bars. See Table 49 for symbol coding.

239

Chapter

Barcodes

Readable Data
barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode and to the left of the
vertical barcodes. The lower guard band is provided when the readable data
filed is selected.

Table 49. Identicon Symbol Coding
Character

Code

00110

10001

01001

11000

00101

10100

01100

00011

10010

01010

Start

110

Stop

101

Identicon Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p E data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] E [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 50 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

240

Identicon

Table 50. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None
9 or :

The type code for IDENTICON. Enter E.

ratio

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. IDENTICON encodes from 1
through 40 characters. The characters available for
the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

241

Chapter

Barcodes

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode
Intelligent Mail 4-state is a barcode symbology, introduced by USPS to
support the US Mail 4-state customer barcode. It is also known as the USPS
OneCode Solution or USPS 4-State Customer Barcode. This barcode is
identified by four different types of bars:

•
•
•

Full Height - fixed height

•

Descender - extends from the top of the Tracker Limit to the bottom of
the Full Height limit.

Tracker - a small center section
Ascender - extends from the top of the Full Height limit to the bottom of
the Tracker limit.

Full Bar

Ascender

Tracker

Descender

Ascending
Region
Tracking
Region
Descending
Region

Figure 15. Intelligent Mail Barcode Bar Types
Customer Data must be in numeric format only. PDF is not allowed for
Intelligent Mail Barcode.
Additional information regarding use of this barcode can be obtained from the
USPS publication Intelligent Mail Barcode Technical Resource Guide.

Intelligent Mail Command Format
Default Ratio:

242

(cc) dir N j data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

Dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes. Enter C for vertical barcodes.

Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

The type code for Intelligent Mail. Enter j.

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode

data

The barcode data. The table later in this section
shows the valid parameters for the all the fields.
The Tracking Code is 20 digits in length. The
Routing Code is optional, but if it is included, it must
be 5, 9 or 11 digits in length. The minimum total
input data is 20 and the maximum total input data is
31 numeric digits. VGL encodes any length of input
data within this range into a 4-state customer
barcode string consisting of 65 bars. A check digit
is automatically added by VGL.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

Table 51. Data Field Parameters
Type
Tracking
Code

Routing Code
Total

Field

Digits

Barcode Identifier

2
Second digit must be 0 - 4.

Service Type Identifier

Mailer Identifier

6 or 9

Serial Number

9 when Mailer ID is 6 digits
6 when Mailer ID is 9 digits

Delivery Point Zip Code

0, 5, 9, 11
20 minimum, 31 maximum

Intelligent Mail 4-State Barcode Example
The following command generates the horizontal Intelligent Mail barcode
shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BNj01234567094987654321012345678^G^KF^^PN^-

243

Chapter

Barcodes

Interleaved 2/5
The Interleaved 2/5 barcode structure is shown in Figure 16 and described on
following pages.

HEIGHT

STARTING
POSITION

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT

STARTING
POSITION

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

LOWER
GUARD
BAND

STOP
CODE
QUIET
ZONE

QUIET START
ZONE CODE

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

DATA FIELD
LOWER GUARD BAND

HEIGHT

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 16. Interleaved 2/5 Structure

Start/Stop Codes
Unique start and stop codes permit bidirectional scanning. Both start and stop
codes contain bars and spaces. They are automatically produced.

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent numeric characters. The structure is 2 wide elements (bars or
spaces) and 3 narrow elements. In the barcode, two characters are
interleaved (paired); bars are used to represent data characters occupying
the odd-numbered positions, and spaces are used to represent data
characters occupying the even-numbered positions. The interleaving process
requires an even number of characters; if an odd number of characters are
encoded, a leading zero is automatically inserted to change the number of
characters to an even number.

244

Interleaved 2/5

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol
and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided
when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit
An optional check digit is inserted for type k and l barcodes. The optional
check digit is automatically calculated and inserted in the barcode symbol.
The check digit provides the means to verify accurate scanning.

Interleaved 2/5 Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed in Table 52 to print the readable data
field in the corresponding font with the specified
guard band gap.

Table 52. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

245

Chapter

Barcodes

9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

type

Represents the barcode type. Select one of the
I-2/5 barcode type codes shown in Table 53.

Table 53. Interleaved 2/5 Barcodes
Standard
Type Code

Check
Digits

Default Bar/
Space
Ratios*

IBARC,
Type Code

# of Data
Characters

INT2/5

1-40

None

1:1:3:3

INT2/5CD

1-40

Mod 10

1:1:3:3

INT2/5A

1-40

None

1:2:4:5

INT2/5CDA

1-40

Mod 10

1:2:4:5

*Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:
Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.
ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with 9 or :
above) representing the ratios for variable ratio
barcodes. Default ratios are overridden by the
variable ratio feature. The ratio data must be
hexadecimal numbers from 0 through 9 or A
through F. VGL automatically checks the input for
validity. If an invalid character is found in the ratio,
an error message is generated.
Interleaved 2/5 barcodes use four-digit ratios. The
ratios are interpreted from left to right, measuring
the size of each bar or space, in dot width, in the
following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide
bar : wide space. For example, enter 2266 in the
ratio parameter for:
2 dot-wide narrow bar
2 dot-wide narrow space
6 dot-wide wide bar
6 dot-wide wide space

246

Interleaved 2/5

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. Interleaved 2/5 encodes from 1
through 40 characters. The characters available for
the data field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39). If
an odd number of characters are encoded, a
leading zero is automatically inserted in the data
field to change the number of characters to an even
number.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

Interleaved 2/5 Examples
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio Interleaved 2/5
barcode shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is
italicized and barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed
description of alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYK2244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print. ^B introduced the barcode command.
Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.
Letter K selected Interleaved 2/5 with the default 1:1:3:3 ratio.
2244595 is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

247

Chapter

Barcodes

The following command generated the Interleaved 2/5 barcode below using
OCR-B font, double the default ratio, and data of 2244595:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BB9L248A2244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

The following command generates the vertical Interleaved 2/5 barcode below
using standard 10 cpi font with the standard default ratio and data of 2244595:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYK2244595^G^KF^PN^-

i25.ex3

The following command generates the same vertical Interleaved 2/5 barcode
above, except that double the default ratio is used:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9K22662244595^G^KF^-^PN^-

248

Maxicode

Maxicode
The Maxicode barcode is a fixed size matrix symbology made up of an offset
of rows of hexagonal elements arranged around a unique finder pattern.
Maxicode is suitable for high speed scanning applications, and is capable of
encoding all of the 256 ASCII characters.

Readable Data
The Maxicode barcode does not support a human readable form.

Data Field
The data field of a Maxicode barcode is divided into a primary message and a
secondary message. The primary message has a fixed structure, while the
secondary message has a free format. The maximum number of characters
encoded in the message depends on the error correction mechanism used.
When the Standard Error Correction (SEC) method is in use (see the mode
definition, below) a maximum of 84 symbol characters can be encoded. Each
segment in the secondary message is 21 characters long.

Maxicode Command Format
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir N % [Z] mode data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes, C for vertical barcodes.

Enter N to turn off the readable data field.

Represents the Maxicode barcode type. Enter %.

Optional parameter to print the zipper. Enter Z to
exercise this option.

mode

Represents the desired Maxicode mode. The legal
modes are 2, 3, 4, and 6. If mode 0 is entered, it is
converted to mode 2 or 3 depending on the postal
code. If mode 1 is entered, it is converted to mode
4. All other modes cause an error to be reported.
Table 54 defines the modes supported.

249

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 54. Maxicode Barcode Mode
Mode

Definition

Primary and secondary messages employ SEC. Primary message
is a structured carrier message with a numeric postal code.

Primary and secondary messages employ SEC. Primary message
is a structured carrier message with an alphanumeric postal code.

Primary and secondary messages together encode up to 93
characters.

Primary and secondary messages together encode up to 93
characters. For reader configuration purposes only.
data

Represents the data to be barcoded. There are two
different ways the Maxicode data field can be
formatted: Standard Data Field and UPS Shipping
Data Field.

Standard Data Field
Modes 2 and 3 have their primary message structured as shown in Table 55.
The data following the primary message is the secondary message and has a
free format.

Table 55. Standard Data Fields
Character
Positions

250

Title

Data

0-2

Class of Service

Numeric

3-5

Country Code

Numeric

6 - 14

Postal Code

9 Digit Numeric for US or
6 Digit Alphanumeric for
Canada

15, 16

Separator

'>A'

17 - ...

Secondary Message

Free Format

Maxicode

UPS Shipping Data Field
This syntax begins with seven encoded data characters followed by a date
(yy). The first four characters are the Message Header and the next five are
the Transportation Data Format Header. The format of the Message Header
is “[)>Rs”. The Transportation Data Format Header is “01Gsyy” where yy is
the year, and “G's” and “R's” are control characters. The structure is shown in
Table 56.

Table 56. UPS Shipping Data Fields
Character
Positions

Title

Data

0-3

Message Header

[)>Rs

4-8

Transportation Data Format
Header

01Gsyy

9 - 17

Postal Code

9 Digit Numeric for US or
6 Digit Alphanumeric for
Canada

Separator

19 - 21

Country Code

Numeric

Separator

23 - 25

Class of Service

Numeric

Separator

27 - ...

Secondary Message

As per the UPS Guide To
Barcoding

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration followed by any valid
command character or G, the universal sequence
terminator.

251

Chapter

Barcodes

Maxicode Control Characters
The non-printable control characters can be generated by using the switch
characters defined in Table 57.
NOTE: If a “>” has to be part of the data stream, enter the character twice.
NOTE: = Shift Out Character

Table 57. Maxicode Control Characters

252

Control
Characters

Alternate
Characters

NUL

SOH

STX

ETX

EOT

ENQ

ACK

BEL

(

)

DLE

DC1

DC2

DC3

DC4

NAK

SYN

ETB

CAN

SUM

ESC

Maxicode

Maxicode Examples
The following command generates the Maxicode barcode shown below. In
the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and barcode data is
boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of alphanumeric
commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,050^BN%2999840068107317>AThis is a secondary
message.^G^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 0.5 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data
placement.
^B introduced the barcode command.
N selects no readable data field.
% selected Maxicode barcode.
2 selects Maxicode mode 2.
999840068107317 is the primary barcode data.
>A separates the primary barcode data from the secondary barcode data
(“This is a secondary message”).
^G^- terminated the barcode command sequence.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following example generates the MAXICODE barcode shown below:
NOTE: “|” in the barcode represents the Shift Out Character.
^PY^-^M10,10,050^IBARC,MAXICODE,N,2[)>|n01|m96841706672|m840|
m001|m1Z12345675|mUPSN|m12345E|m089|m|m1/1|m10.1|mY|m|m|mUT|n|
$^G^-^PN^-

253

Chapter

Barcodes

MSI
The MSI structure is shown in Figure 23 and described on the following
pages.

HEIGHT

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

CHECK DIGIT
FIELD

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE

START
CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT
QUIET
ZONE

LOWER
GUARD
BAND
HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND

STOP
CODE
QUIET
ZONE

OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

Figure 17. MSI Barcode Structure

Data Field
The MSI barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces
to represent numeric characters. The structure is 1-module-wide narrow
elements and 2-module-wide wide elements; elements can be a bar or a
space. Each character is composed of 4 data bits, with each bit made up of a
bar and a space totalling 3 modules.

254

MSI

Readable Data
The optional readable data field provides a readable interpretation of the
barcode data. barcode data is printed below the horizontal barcode symbol,
and to the left of a vertical barcode symbol. The lower guard band is provided
when the readable data field is selected.

Check Digit
The check digit provides the means of verifying accurate scanning. For MSI
Types G, H, I, and X, a specific check digit, Modulo-10 or Modulo-11 (or both),
is automatically calculated and appended in the barcode symbol. MSI Type F
does not use a check digit.

MSI Command Format
NOTE: See page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p type data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] type [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes listed below to print the readable data field in
the corresponding font with the specified guard
band gap.

Table 58. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

255

Chapter

Barcodes

9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

type

Represents the barcode type. As shown in Table
59, MSI Types F, G, H, I, and X are available. Enter
the type code corresponding to the MSI barcode
type desired.

Table 59. MSI Barcodes
Standard
Type Code

Default Bar/
Space
Ratios*

IBARC,
Type Code

# of Data
Characters

MSI

1-13

None

1:1:2:2

MSI10

1-13

Mod 10

1:1:2:2

MSI1010

1-13

Mod 10, Mod 10

1:1:2:2

MSI1110

1-13

Mod 11, Mod 10

1:1:2:2

MSI11

1-13

Mod 11

1:1:2:2

Check Digits

*Ratios represent dot width of the bar/space elements as follows:
Narrow Bar : Narrow Space : Wide Bar : Wide Space.
ratio

256

MSI

MSI barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios are
interpreted from left to right, measuring the size of
each bar or space, in dot width, in the following
pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide bar : wide
space. For example, enter 2244 in the ratio
parameter for:
2 dot-wide narrow bar
2 dot-wide narrow space
4 dot-wide wide bar
4 dot-wide wide space
NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however, a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. MSI encodes from 1 through 13
characters. The available characters for the data
field are 0 through 9 (hex 30 through 39).

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

MSI Barcode Examples
The following command generates the horizontal default ratio MSI barcode
shown below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BYH87654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.ex1

257

Chapter

Barcodes

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
The character height selected was 1.0 inches and character width was
selected at 1.0 inches.
A 0.0 justification value plus 0 additional dots was selected for the data
placement.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
Y selected the standard 10 cpi font to print the optional readable data field.
Letter H selected MSI barcode Type H, which automatically appends two Mod
10 check digits to the barcode data.
87654321 is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the horizontal MSI barcode below using
OCR-B font and double the default ratio:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BB9X224487654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.e

The following command generates the vertical MSI barcode below using
standard 10 cpi font, the standard default ratio, and data of 87654321:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CYF87654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.ex3

258

MSI

The following command generates the same vertical MSI barcode above,
except that double the default ratio is used:
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^CY9I224487654321^G^KF^-^PN^-

msi.ex4

259

Chapter

Barcodes

PDF417
The PDF417 structure is shown in Figure 18 and described on the following
pages.

QUIET
ZONE

SR, SC
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

STOP
CODE

CCW

CW
DATA
FIELD

START
CODE

UPPER
GUARD
BAND

DATA
FIELD

LOWER
GUARD
BAND

Normal

QUIET
ZONE

UPPER
GUARD
BAND

QUIET
ZONE

SR, SC
POSITION

STOP
CODE

UPPER GUARD BAND

START
CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

START
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

LOWER GUARD BAND

SR, SC
POSITION

INV

QUIET
ZONE

LOWER GUARD BAND

STOP
CODE

UPPER GUARD BAND

Figure 18. PDF417 Structure

260

PDF417

Quiet Zone
Both ends of the barcode structure require blank quiet zones. The quiet zones
must be at least 0.25 inches wide and completely blank to ensure accurate
reading of the start/stop codes and to prevent adjacent barcodes from
overlapping. Be sure to provide sufficient space on the form for the quiet
zones.

Start/Stop Codes
The start/stop codes identify the leading and trailing end of the barcode.

Data Field
PDF417 provides twelve modes to encode data. The first three are preestablished (the remaining nine are user modes, which can be defined by
users or industry associations according to specific applications):
1. Extended Alphanumeric Compaction mode (EXC). Comprised of four
sub-modes, this mode offers encodation of all printable ASCII characters.
This is the default mode; the IGP uses shift or latch characters to enable
other modes.
2. Binary/ASCII Plus mode. This offers encodation for all ASCII characters,
printable or not, and binary values.
3. Numeric Compaction mode. This offers encodation for numeric values to
a density of almost 3 digits per code word.
4. The IGP will automatically switch between modes to provide the smallest
encodation for the data.

Security Level
PDF417 can detect and correct errors. Each label has 2 code words of error
detection. You can select the error correction capacity based on application
needs. Specify a security level in the range of 0 - 8, at the time of printing.
PDF417 can also recover from omissions and misdecodes of code words.
Since it requires two code words to recover from a misdecode, one to detect
the error and one to correct for it, a given security level can support half the
number of misdecodes that it can of undecoded words.

PDF
Print Data Field is not offered due to the large amount of data that can be
encoded.

261

Chapter

Barcodes

PDF417 Command Format
Default Ratio:

262

(cc) dir p type [X[D]n] [Y[D]n] [(Hn)] (Wn)] [Ah:w]
[Rn] [Cn] [Sn], DATA^G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal or C for vertical barcodes.

An optional readable data field. Enter N so no
readable data prints in this field.

type

Enter & for PDF417.

X[D]n

Optional parameter to designate the width of the
narrow element in either the default 60 X 72 dots
per inch or, if the D is given, in target dots. The
default size is 1/60th of an inch.

Y[D]n

Optional parameter to designate the height of the
barcode in either the default 60 X 72 dots per inch
or, if the D is given, in target dots. The default size
is 2/72nd of an inch.

Optional parameter to adjust the overall height of
the barcode symbol (including human readable
data). Height adjustments are made in 0.1-inch
increments; enter H and a value from 4 through 99
to select height adjustments from 0.4 through 9.9
inches. Parameters Wn, Rn, Cn or A cannot be
entered if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter to adjust the maximum width of
the symbol based on the narrow element width.
Enter Wn; where n is the overall width in tenths of
an inch. Parameters Hn, Rn, Cn or A cannot be
entered if this parameter is used.

Ah:w

Optional parameter for specifying the symbol
height-to-width ratio where h is the height and w is
the width, both expressed as integers. The default
is 1:2. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn, or Cn cannot be
entered if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the number of
rows the symbol will have. Enter R followed by the
number of rows in the range of 3 through 90 in
multiples of 3. Parameters Hn, Wn, Cn or A cannot
be entered if this parameter is used.

Optional parameter that specifies the number of
columns the symbol will have. Enter C followed by
the number of columns in the range of 1 through
90. Parameters Hn, Wn, Rn or A cannot be entered
if this parameter is used.

PDF417

Optional parameter that specifies the security level.
Enter S followed by the security level in the range
of 0 through 8. The default is 2.

data

Enter the data for the barcode. A null data field (no
characters) is not permitted. The data field can
contain any character including carriage returns
and line feeds. The length of the data field is
variable; however, the maximum length is usually
limited to 1024 bytes to minimize potential reading
errors.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

PDF417 Example
Figure 19 illustrates a horizontal PDF417 barcode generated by the following
program:
^PY^^M10,10,000^KF^BN&X1Y2,ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmn
opqrstuvwxyz‘1234567890=\[];’,./!@#$%^&()_+|{}:”<>?^G^KF^-^PN^-

Figure 19. Sample PDF417 Barcode

263

Chapter

Barcodes

Planet
The Planet barcode was introduced by the U.S. Postal Service under the
product name “Confirm.” Planet is a 12-digit barcode used to track mail
electronically, both inbound and outbound. Under the “Confirm” process, the
first two digits of the Planet data field defines the service expected. The next
nine digits are customer information, and the last digit is the check digit.
The Planet barcode structure is illustrated in Figure 20 and Figure 21 and
described on the following pages. The Planet code can be a part of the
address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4-inch area across the
width of the mail piece.
The Planet barcode cannot use variable ratios and does not have a readable
data field.

Return Address Area

Postage Area

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA
1/2"

1/2"
4"

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET ZONE
QUIET
ZONE

START
CODE

BAR CODE DATA FIELD

STOP
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

QUIET ZONE
CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 20. Planet Structure
NOTE: Additional information regarding Planet barcode requirements can be
obtained from the U.S. Postal Service's Publication 25: A Guide to
Business Mail Preparation.

264

Planet

QUIET
ZONE
STARTING
POSITION

Return Address Area

1/2"

START
CODE

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

BAR
CODE
DATA
FIELD

CHECK DIGIT
STOP
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

Postage Area

1/2"

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale.

Figure 21. Planet Structure (Vertical Bar)

265

Chapter

Barcodes

Quiet Zone
The barcode structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which extends
4.75 inches from the right edge of the mail piece. In addition, a minimum quiet
zone of 0.040-inch above and below the barcode data must also be provided.
You must provide sufficient space for this zone.

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in Planet. The start
and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading and trailing
end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with each
barcode. The start/stop code structure permits barcode scanning in a left-to
right direction only.

Data Field
The barcode data produces a single field of 60 bars for an 11-digit data field.
The bars are grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of three
tall bars and two short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code,
plus the four-digit zip code extension. If the Delivery Point Barcode is used, an
additional two-digit code is also added to make an 11-digit data field.
Exact barcode dimensions depend on the type of printer used, but fall within
the following specifications:
Each bar width is equal and is .020-inch ± .005-inch. Each bar height is either
a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0, respectively. Each tall bar
is .125-inch ± .010-inch; each short bar is .050-inch ± .010-inch. Horizontal
spacing between bars (pitch) is 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any 0.50-inch
portion of the barcode. Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is
0.0416-inch and .050-inch, respectively, with a clear vertical space ranging
from 0.012-inch to 0.040-inch between bars.

Check Digit
The twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character. The Mod 10
check digit is added automatically to verify accurate scanning.

266

Planet

Planet Command Format
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir N r data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

The type code for Planet. Enter r.

data

The barcode data. Planet barcodes encode exactly
11 numeric digits. A check digit is automatically
added by VGL.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

NOTE: The Planet barcode symbol height is fixed at 0.125 inches.

267

Chapter

Barcodes

Planet Examples
The following command generates the horizontal Planet barcode shown
below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M^KF^BNr01234567890^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
N selected no readable data field.
r selected Planet barcode.
01234567890 is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.
The following command generated the vertical Planet barcode below with
data of 01234567890:
^PY^-^M^KF^CNr01234567890^G^KF^-^PN^-

268

POSTNET

POSTNET
The POSTNET barcode structure is illustrated in Figure 22 and Figure 23 and
described on the following pages. The POSTNET code can be a part of the
address block and appear anywhere within a vertical 4-inch area across the
width of the mail piece.
The POSTNET barcode cannot use variable ratios and does not have a
readable data field.

Return Address Area

Postage Area

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA
1/2"

1/2"
4"

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET ZONE
QUIET
ZONE

START
CODE

STOP
CODE

BAR CODE DATA FIELD

QUIET
ZONE

QUIET ZONE
CHECK DIGIT

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale

Figure 22. POSTNET Structure
NOTE: Additional information regarding POSTNET barcode requirements
can be obtained from the U.S. Postal Service's Publication 25: A
Guide to Business Mail Preparation.

269

Chapter

Barcodes

QUIET
ZONE
STARTING
POSITION

Return Address Area

1/2"

START
CODE

DATA
FIELD

CHECK DIGIT

ADDRESS BLOCK BAR CODE READ AREA

BAR
CODE

STOP
CODE

QUIET
ZONE

Postage Area

1/2"

NOTE: Illustration is not to scale.

Figure 23. POSTNET Structure (Vertical Bar)

270

POSTNET

Start/Stop Code
The start and stop codes are referred to as “framing bars” in POSTNET. The
start and stop codes are each one tall bar, one identifying the leading and
trailing end of the barcode. The start/stop code is automatically produced with
each barcode. The start/stop code structure permits barcode scanning in a
left-to right direction only.

Data Field
The barcode data produces a single field of 30 bars for a 5-digit field, 50 bars
for a 9-digit data field, or 60 bars for an 11-digit data field. The bars are
grouped in sets of five. Each set of five bars (comprised of two tall bars and
three short bars) represents one of the five digits of the zip code, plus the
four-digit zip code extension. If the Delivery Point Barcode is used, an
additional two-digit code is also added to make an 11-digit data field.
Exact barcode dimensions depend on the type of printer used, but fall within
the following specifications:
Each bar width is equal and is .020-inch ± .005-inch. Each bar height is either
a tall (full) or short (half) bar, representing a 1 or 0, respectively. Each tall bar
is .125-inch ± .010-inch; each short bar is .050-inch ± .010-inch. Horizontal
spacing between bars (pitch) is 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any 0.50-inch
portion of the barcode. Horizontal spacing at 24 and 20 bars per inch is
0.0416-inch and .050-inch, respectively, with a clear vertical space ranging
from 0.012-inch to 0.040-inch between bars.

Check Digit
The sixth, tenth, or twelfth digit represents the automatic check digit character
for the 5, 9, or 11-digit data field, respectively. The Mod 10 check digit is
added automatically to verify accurate scanning.

271

Chapter

Barcodes

POSTNET Command Format
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir N * data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

The type code for POSTNET. Enter *.

data

The barcode data. POSTNET barcodes encode
exactly 5, 9, or 11 numeric digits. A check digit is
automatically added by VGL.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

NOTE: The POSTNET barcode symbol height is fixed at 0.125 inches.

POSTNET Example
The following command generates the horizontal POSTNET barcode shown
below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M^KF^BN*927047563^G^KF^-^PN^-

^PY^- enabled the graphics command sequence.
^M introduced the standard alphanumeric command.
^KF activated Dark Print.
^B introduced the barcode command.
N selected no readable data field.
Asterisk (*) selected POSTNET barcode.
927047563 is the barcode data.
^G terminated the barcode command sequence.
^KF^- at the end of the barcode sequence turned off Dark Print.
^PN^- terminated the graphics mode.

272

Royal Mail

Royal Mail
The Royal Mail barcode, like POSTNET, is used for mailing applications.
However, the barcode can encode full addresses on labels. Royal Mail
barcodes are similar to POSTNET in terms of bar space and width, but have
four different types of bars (Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and Tracker),
whereas POSTNET only has two bar types (Tall and Short).
The Royal Mail symbology converts alphanumeric characters into patterns of
four bars, using combinations of Full Height, Ascender, Descender, and
Trackers. It also adds start and stop barcodes as well as a check digit.

Quiet Zone
The barcode structure requires a completely blank quiet zone which is a 2mm
border on each side of the barcode.

Data Field
Royal Mail barcodes use four types of bars to encode its data: Full Height,
Ascender, Descender, and Tracker. Each Full Height bar is 0.198 inch ±
0.030 inch. The Ascender and Descender bars are about 62.5% of the Full
Height bar in length, while the Tracker bar is about 25% of the Full Height bar.
Each bar width is equal, and must be .020-inch ± .005-inch. Horizontal
spacing between bars (pitch) must be 22 bars ± 2 bars per inch over any
0.50-inch portion of the barcode.
Royal Mail barcodes have a variable length of data field, which consists of
valid characters “0” through “9” and “A” through “Z”. Each character is
encoded with four bars of varied types.

Check Digit
A modulo-6 check digit is added automatically to the end of the barcode to
verify accurate scanning.

273

Chapter

Barcodes

Royal Mail Command Format
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir N Y data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes. Enter C for vertical barcodes.

Turns off the readable data field. Enter N.

The type code for Royal Mail. Enter Y.

data

The barcode data. A check digit is automatically
added by VGL.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

Royal Mail Example
The following command generates the horizontal Royal Mail barcode shown
below. In the command sequence, graphics mode data is italicized and
barcode data is boldface. See Chapter 2 for a detailed description of
alphanumeric commands.
^PY^-^M10,10,000^KF^BNY050LU178XE2B^G^KF^-^PN^-

274

Telepen

Telepen
The Telepen structure is shown in Figure 24 and described on the following
pages.

STARTING
POSITION

QUIET
ZONE
START
CODE

OPTIONAL
READABLE
DATA
FIELD

DATA
FIELD

OPTIONAL
CHECK
DIGIT

OPTIONAL
CHECK DIGIT

STARTING
POSITION

LOWER
GUARD
BAND
QUIET START
ZONE CODE

DATA FIELD

STOP QUIET
CODE ZONE

STOP
CODE

HEIGHT

LOWER GUARD BAND
OPTIONAL READABLE DATA FIELD

QUIET
ZONE

HEIGHT

Figure 24. Telepen Structure

Data Field
The barcode symbol uses a series of wide and narrow bars and spaces to
represent standard alphanumeric characters. Each character is represented
by a different series of bars and spaces, both wide and narrow, but is always
16 units in width (for a wide to narrow ratio of 3). Each character starts with a
bar and ends with a space.

275

Chapter

Barcodes

Check Digit
A mandatory modulo-127 check digit is inserted into the barcode. This feature
provides a means of verifying accurate scanning.

Telepen Command Format
NOTE: Refer to page 164 for the IBARC, command format and definitions.
Default Ratio:

(cc) dir p J data (cc)G

Variable Ratio:

(cc) dir p [9] [:] J [ratio] data (cc)G

(cc)

Represents the Special Function Control Code
(SFCC). Enter the specific SFCC for your VGL
configuration.

dir

Represents the direction of the barcode. Enter B for
horizontal barcodes; enter C for vertical barcodes.

Prints the optional readable data field. The
readable data field is printed below a horizontal
barcode or on the left-hand side of a vertical
barcode.
Replace p in the barcode command with one of the
codes in Table 27 to print the readable data field in
the corresponding font with the specified guard
band gap.

Table 60. Printable Data Field Fonts
Font

Gap

p code

Standard 10 cpi

3 dots

OCR-A

3 dots

OCR-A

.1-inch

OCR-B

3 dots

OCR-B

.1-inch

None

276

Telepen

9 or :

Selects the variable ratio length barcode feature,
which permits unique bar and space width ratios
adjusted for specific applications.
Enter the number 9 to select variable ratio
barcodes represented in line matrix printer dots (60
x 72 dpi).
Enter : to select variable ratio barcodes
represented in actual printer dots (203 x 203 dpi or
300 x 300 dpi, depending on the printer head being
used).

The type code for Telepen. Enter J.

ratio

Optional parameter (used in conjunction with
parameter 9 or :) representing the ratios for
variable ratio barcodes. The default ratios are
overridden by the variable ratio feature. The ratio
data must be hexadecimal numbers from 0 through
9 or A through F. VGL automatically checks the
input for validity. If an invalid character is found in
the ratio, an error message is generated.
Telepen barcodes use four-digit ratios. The ratios
are interpreted from left to right, measuring the size
of each bar or space, in dot width according to the
following pattern: narrow bar : narrow space : wide
bar : wide space. For example, enter 2266 in the
ratio parameter for:
2 dot-wide narrow bar
2 dot-wide narrow space
6 dot-wide wide bar
6 dot-wide wide space.

NOTE: VGL automatically checks ratio data for validity only within the
allowable hexadecimal range. VGL does not verify that ratio data
creates acceptable wide/narrow element relationships for barcode
readability. For example, VGL accepts wide/narrow ratio values of 2
and 5, respectively; however a narrow element larger than the wide
element produces an unreadable barcode. When designing unique
ratio data, carefully plot wide and narrow ratios to conform to
readable barcodes.
data

The barcode data. Telepen encodes 1 through 40
characters from the Telepen full ASCII Character
Set shown in Table 29.

(cc)G

Terminates the barcode command. Enter the SFCC
for your VGL configuration immediately followed by
any valid command character or G, the universal
sequence terminator.

277

Chapter

Barcodes

Table 61. Telepen Character Set
ASCII